WO2016090403A1 - Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists - Google Patents

Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016090403A1
WO2016090403A1 PCT/AU2014/001124 AU2014001124W WO2016090403A1 WO 2016090403 A1 WO2016090403 A1 WO 2016090403A1 AU 2014001124 W AU2014001124 W AU 2014001124W WO 2016090403 A1 WO2016090403 A1 WO 2016090403A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
optionally substituted
group
alkyl
hsc
cells
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/AU2014/001124
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Susan Kaye Nilsson
David Norman Haylock
Benjamin Ben Ming CAO
Original Assignee
Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation filed Critical Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation
Priority to KR1020217032814A priority Critical patent/KR20210128024A/en
Priority to SG11201704532VA priority patent/SG11201704532VA/en
Priority to BR112017012365A priority patent/BR112017012365A2/en
Priority to CN201480084631.4A priority patent/CN107405331A/en
Priority to JP2017531344A priority patent/JP2017538715A/en
Priority to PCT/AU2014/001124 priority patent/WO2016090403A1/en
Priority to US15/535,117 priority patent/US20170348375A1/en
Priority to AU2014413901A priority patent/AU2014413901B2/en
Priority to KR1020177019250A priority patent/KR20170109541A/en
Priority to EP14907978.2A priority patent/EP3229797A4/en
Priority to CA2970058A priority patent/CA2970058A1/en
Publication of WO2016090403A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016090403A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/04Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/05Dipeptides
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/401Proline; Derivatives thereof, e.g. captopril
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/28Bone marrow; Haematopoietic stem cells; Mesenchymal stem cells of any origin, e.g. adipose-derived stem cells
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/19Cytokines; Lymphokines; Interferons
    • A61K38/193Colony stimulating factors [CSF]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/19Cytokines; Lymphokines; Interferons
    • A61K38/20Interleukins [IL]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22Hormones
    • A61K38/28Insulins
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/06Animal cells or tissues; Human cells or tissues
    • C12N5/0602Vertebrate cells
    • C12N5/0634Cells from the blood or the immune system
    • C12N5/0647Haematopoietic stem cells; Uncommitted or multipotent progenitors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K2035/124Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells the cells being hematopoietic, bone marrow derived or blood cells
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2300/00Mixtures or combinations of active ingredients, wherein at least one active ingredient is fully defined in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2501/00Active agents used in cell culture processes, e.g. differentation
    • C12N2501/50Cell markers; Cell surface determinants
    • C12N2501/585Integrins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2509/00Methods for the dissociation of cells, e.g. specific use of enzymes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to enhancing dislodgement and release of haematopoietic stem cells (HSC) and precursors and progenitors thereof from a bone marrow (BM) stem cell niche and methods for enhancing the dislodgement and release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from the BM and the stem cell niche.
  • the invention also relates to compositions for use in enhancing the dislodgement and release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof.
  • Cell populations of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof which have been dislodged and released by the methods and compositions are included as well as the use of the cell populations for treatment of a haematological disorder and transplantation of the HSC, precursors and progenitors thereof.
  • HSC regulation and retention within the BM stem cell niche is mediated through interactions between HSC surface receptors and their respective ligands expressed by surrounding cells such as osteoblasts and sinusoidal endothelial cells.
  • Spatial distribution analysis of HSC within BM using functional assays and in vivo and ex vivo imaging indicate they preferentially localize nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche.
  • HSC identical to the classic Lin-Sca- 1 +ckit+CD150+CD48- phenotype, but isolated from endosteal BM have greater homing potential and enhanced long-term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity.
  • the therapeutic targeting of endosteal HSC for mobilization should provide better transplant outcomes.
  • haematopoiesis to the BM involves developmental ⁇ regulated adhesive interactions between primitive haematopoietic cells and the stromal-cell- mediated haematopoietic microenvironment of the BM stem cell niche.
  • HSC are retained in the BM niche by adhesive interactions with stromal elements (such as VCAM-1 and osteopontin (Opn)) leading to the physiologic retention of primitive haematopoietic progenitor cells in the BM.
  • stromal elements such as VCAM-1 and osteopontin (Opn)
  • a perturbation of the adhesive interactions can lead to the release of the HSC retained in the BM and evoke the release of stem/progenitor cells from the bone marrow niche and eventually into the circulation by mobilization.
  • Releasing and mobilising specific populations of HSC may allow uses in various situations including transplantation, gene therapy, treatment of disease including cancers such as leukaemias, neoplastic cancers including breast cancers, or repair of tissues and skin.
  • cancers such as leukaemias, neoplastic cancers including breast cancers, or repair of tissues and skin.
  • to mobilize HSC requires rapid and selective mobilization regimes which can initially dislodge the HSC from the BM. Dislodgement and release of specific cell populations of HSC from the BM stem cell niche can provide greater long-term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution.
  • PB peripheral blood
  • HSC haematopoietic stem cells
  • BM bone marrow
  • G-CSF granulocyte-colony stimulating factor
  • G-CSF G-CSF
  • AMD3100 the FDA-approved CXCR4 antagonist AMD3100 (Plerixafor; MozobilTM) has been shown to rapidly mobilize HSC with limited toxicity issues.
  • clinical mobilization with AMD3100 is only effective in combination with G-CSF and the search for rapid, selective and G-CSF independent mobilization regimens remains a topic of clinical interest.
  • G-CSF is the most extensively used mobilization agent, its drawbacks further include potentially toxic side effects, a relatively long course of treatment (5-7 days of consecutive injections), and variable responsiveness of patients.
  • the HSC must be released from their attachment to the BM stem cell niche.
  • the molecules that are important in niche function and retaining the HSC in the niche environment include VCAM-1 , Osteopontin (Opn) and Tenasin-C.
  • Integrins such as ⁇ 4 ⁇ have been implicated in the mobilization of HSC. Specifically both ⁇ 4 ⁇ (VLA-4) and ctgPi integrins expressed by HSC have been implicated in stem cell quiescence and niche retention through binding to VCAM-1 and osteopontin (Opn) within the endosteal region. While the role of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin in HSC mobilization is unknown, the down-regulation of Opn using non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID) as well as selective inhibition of integrin a 4 or G-CSF has validated Opn/VCAM-1 binding to integrins as effective targets for HSC mobilization. However, various characteristics such as binding to small molecules such as integrins show that they are distinctly different molecules.
  • NSAID non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • Pepinsky et al (2002) the difference between ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins is evident in their binding characteristics. Pepinsky shows that the differences in binding to small molecule N-benzene-sulfonyl)-(L)-prolyl-(L)-0-(1 -pyrrolidinyl carbonyl) tyrosine (BOP) is evident with EGTA treatment. The treatment inhibited binding of the monoclonal antibody 9EG7 to ⁇ 4 ⁇ , whereas it stimulated the binding of 9EG7 to ⁇ 9 ⁇ .
  • a method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche in the presence or absence of G-CSF.
  • the dislodgement of the HSC leads to release of the HSC from the BM stem cell binding ligand which enables the HSC to mobilize from the BM to the PB and thereby enhances mobilization of the HSC. Further stimulation of mobilization can be assisted by the use of mobilization agents that further enhance mobilization of HSC to the PB.
  • the HSC are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group including CD34 + cells, CD38 + cells, CD90 + cells, CD133 + cells, CD34 + CD38 " cells, lineage- committed CD34 " cells, or CD34 + CD38 + cells.
  • the antagonist of an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin or an active portion thereof is an an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin or an active portion thereof.
  • the method further includes administering an antagonist of a 4 integrin or an active portion thereof.
  • a 4 integrin is an antagonist of ⁇ 4 ⁇ or an active portion thereof.
  • the antagonist cross-reacts with ag and a 4 , and optionally cross-reacts with ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 4 ⁇ .
  • the antagonist is a a g Pi/a 4 Piantagonist or an active portion thereof.
  • the antagonist is a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
  • X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO 2 -;
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of H and Ci-C 4 alkyl
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 7 ;
  • R 4 when R 4 is H then R 5 is -OR 7 and when R 4 is -OR 6 then R 5 is H;
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 8 , -C(O)R 9 and -C(O)NR 10 R 11 ;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(O)R 13 and -C(O)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C 4 alkyl), -C(O)-(C C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl; R 10 and R 1 1 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is:
  • the compound of Formula (I) is or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • compositions for enhancing dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand comprising an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described.
  • an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof to a subject wherein said effective amount enhances dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche;
  • methods for the treatment of a haematological disorder in a subject said method comprising administering to the subject in the presence or absence of G-CSF, a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described or a cell composition comprising HSC harvested from a subject administered with the antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • the haematological disorder is a haematopoietic neoplastic disorder and the method involves chemosensitizing the HSC to alter susceptibility of the HSC, such that a chemotherapeutic agent, having become ineffective, becomes more effective.
  • a method of transplanting HSC into a patient comprising
  • Figure 1 shows the generation of LN18-derived cell lines.
  • Stable LN18 cells over- expressing human integrin a 4 Piand ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ were generated via retroviral transduction of human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines.
  • Silencing of background a 4 expression in parental and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ transduced LN18 cells was achieved by retroviral vector delivery of a 4 shRNA.
  • Figure 2 shows antibody staining of ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ LN18 cells.
  • Control LN18 SiA4, LN18 ⁇ 4 ⁇ , and LN18 ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ cells were stained with mouse isotype control, mouse-anti- human a 4 antibody or mouse-anti-human ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ antibody and then secondary labelled with Alexa Fluor 594 conjugated goat-anti-mouse lgG1 . Cells counterstained with DAPI (blue).
  • Figure 6 shows flow cytometric histogram plots of (a) bone marrow haematopoietic progenitor cells (LSK) and (b) HSC (LSKSLAM) isolated from untreated (grey lines) and R-BC154 (10 mg kg-1 ) injected (red lines) C57BI/6 mice. Data is representative of 3 biological samples. Fluorescent microscopy images (inset) of FACS sorted progenitor cells (Lineage-Sea- 1 +c-Kit+) isolated from (c) untreated and (d) R-BC154 injected mice. Sca-1 + (blue), c-Kit+ (green), R-BC154+ (red).
  • Figure 7 shows R-BC154 preferentially binds murine and human haematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro,
  • MFI mean fluorescence intensity
  • Dotted shaded curves represent unstained LSK cells, (g) Comparative R-BC154 binding to lymphoid (B220 + and CD3 + ) and myeloid (Gr1 Mac1 + ), LSK and LSKSLAM cells from central (blue bar) and endosteal (red bar) BM in the presence of 1 mM Ca 2+ /Mg 2+ binding. Data is representative of 2 separate experiments.
  • P1 CD34 "
  • P2 CD34 + CD38 +
  • P3 CD34 + CD38 "
  • P1 CD34 "
  • P2 CD34 + CD38 +
  • Figure 9 shows R-BC154 targets HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated integrins within the endosteal niche in situ, (a) Representative histogram plot of R- BC154 binding on gated LSK cells from central (blue) and endosteal (red) BM harvested from mice injected with R-BC154.
  • R-BC154 hl population is depicted.
  • %R-BC154 hi cells within lymphoid (B220 + and CD3 + ) and myeloid (Gr1 + and Mac1 + ) progenies isolated from endosteal (red bar) and central (blue bar) BM 5 mins after R-BC154 injection (n 3).
  • Figure 10 shows (a) Analysis of the WBC content, (b) LSK content and (c) LSKSLAM content in peripheral blood of mice treated with R-BC154 at 15 and 30 mins post- injection. Data is mean ⁇ SEM and is not-significant (One-way ANOVA).
  • Figure 1 1 shows Small molecule ⁇ - ⁇ / ⁇ integrin antagonist BOP rapidly mobilizes HSC and progenitors,
  • Calculated IC 5 o values are depicted inset
  • Haematopoietic stem cell mobilization is a process whereby haematopoietic stem cells are stimulated out of the bone marrow space (e.g., the hip bones and the chest bone) into the bloodstream, so they are available for collection for future reinfusion or they naturally egress from the bone marrow to move throughout the body to lodge in organs such as the spleen to provide blood cells.
  • This interesting natural phenomenon that often accompanies various haematological disorders, may be adapted as a useful component of therapy, given the discovery of agents that can artificially incite mobilization of HSCs into the bloodstream where they can be collected and used for purposes such as transplantation.
  • Compounds such as G- CSF and the FDA-approved CXCR-4 antagonist AMD 3100 have been shown to mobilize HSC. However, toxicity issues and various side effects can result from this treatment.
  • HSC Before HSC can mobilize, they must be dislodged and released from the BM stem cell niche in which they reside and are retained by adhesive interactions.
  • a method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
  • HSC In steady state conditions, HSC reside in the BM in specialized locations called the BM stem cell niche. Here they reside as quiescent stem cells before they are released ready to enter the PB and lodge in tissues to start differentiating.
  • the HSC are retained in the BM stem cell niche by adhesion molecules or binding ligands such as but not limited to VCAM-1 , Opn and Tenacin-C.
  • adhesion molecules or binding ligands such as but not limited to VCAM-1 , Opn and Tenacin-C.
  • Management of the HSC/BM stem cell niche interaction is instrumental the dislodgement and release of HSC to the BM stem cell niche and eventually to the PB.
  • the present invention provides a means to dislodge and release the HSC from the interactions in the BM stem cell niche by disrupting the adhesive interactions and binding ligands between the HSC and the BM stem cell niche environment. The cells then become available for mobilizing to the PB or they may remain in the BM.
  • the BM stem cell niche includes the endosteal niche and the central medullary cavity.
  • the endosteal stem cell niche is located at the endosteum of the bone marrow, where osteoblasts are the main regulators of HSC functions such as proliferation and quiescence. Furthermore, a significant proportion of HSC are closely associated with sinusoidal endothelial cells in the endothelial niche where they are ready to enter peripheral blood and start differentiation.
  • the central medullary cavity is the central cavity of the bone responsible for the formation of red blood cells and white blood cells otherwise known as the bone marrow.
  • Applicants have found that by inhibiting at least the ctg integrin with small molecule antagonists, HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof can dislodge from the BM stem cell niche preferably into the endosteal niche or mobilize into the PB with long term multi-lineage engraftment potential.
  • an antagonist to ctg integrin or an active portion thereof significantly increases the dislodgement and release of at least CD34 + stem cells and progenitors into the blood.
  • Applicants have developed a fluorescent small molecule integrin antagonist, R-BC154 (1 ) ( Figure 1 a), based on a series of /V-phenylsulfonylproline dipeptides, which bind activated human and murine ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins as well as BM HSC and progenitors ( Figure 1 a).
  • this family of compounds would target potent endosteal HSC for mobilization based on the restricted interaction between ⁇ - ⁇ / ⁇ and Opn within endosteal BM.
  • therapeutic targeting of endosteal HSC using ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin inhibitors offers a promising alternative to current mobilization strategies for stem cell transplant applications.
  • Integrins are non-covalently linked ⁇ heterodimeric trans-membrane proteins that function primarily as mediators of cell adhesion and cell signalling processes. In mammals, 18 a-chains and 8 ⁇ -chains have been identified, with at least 24 different and unique ⁇ combinations described to date.
  • the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin (very late antigen-4; VLA-4) is expressed primarily on leukocytes and are known to be receptors for vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM-1 ), fibronectin and osteopontin (Opn).
  • VCAM-1 vascular cell adhesion molecule-1
  • fibronectin fibronectin
  • osteopontin osteopontin
  • the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin is a key regulator of leukocyte recruitment, migration and activation and has important roles in inflammation and autoimmune disease. Accordingly, significant effort has been focused on the development of small molecule inhibitors of ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin function for the treatment of asthma, multiple sclerosis and Crohn's disease, with several candidates progressing to phase I and II clinical trials.
  • ⁇ 9 ⁇ Whilst the related ⁇ integrin, ⁇ 9 ⁇ , shares many of the structural and functional properties as ⁇ 4 ⁇ and also binds to several of the same ligands including VCAM-1 and Opn there are differences between the integrins ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 9 ⁇ which make them distinct. Unlike ⁇ 4 ⁇ which has a restricted expression that is largely on leukocytes, the cellular expression of ⁇ 9 ⁇ is widespread.
  • HSC haemopoietic stem cells
  • the integrins ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 9 ⁇ are primarily involved in the sequestration and recruitment of HSC to the bone marrow as well as the maintenance of HSC quiescence, a key characteristic for long-term repopulating stem cells.
  • HSC regulation by ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins is mediated through interactions with VCAM-1 and Opn, which are expressed and/or secreted by bone-lining osteoblasts, endothelial cells and other cells of the bone marrow environment.
  • the antagonist of ctg integrin is an antagonist of the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin.
  • Integrin ctg is a protein that in humans is encoded by the ITGA9 gene. This gene encodes an alpha integrin.
  • Integrins are heterodimeric integral membrane glycoproteins composed of an alpha chain and a beta chain that mediate cell functions.
  • the ctg subunit forms a heterodimeric complex with a ⁇ subunit to form the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin. Accordingly, it is preferred that the antagonist of ctg integrin is an antagonist of the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin or an active portion thereof.
  • an active portion of the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin or of the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin is a portion of the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ protein or ⁇ 4 ⁇ protein which retains activity of the integrin. That is, the portion is a part of the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ protein or the ⁇ 4 ⁇ protein which is less than the complete protein, but which can still act in the same or similar manner as the full ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ or ⁇ 4 ⁇ protein.
  • the term "ctg integrin" or "a 4 integrin” or " ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin” or " ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin” is used herein, it also includes reference to any active portions thereof.
  • the antagonist of ctg integrin preferably the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin is also an antagonist of a 4 integrin, preferably the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin. It is desired that the ctg integrin antagonist of the present invention can inhibit the activity of both the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin and ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin. Hence it is preferred that the antagonist is an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ - ⁇ / ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist.
  • the antagonist of the ctg integrin may be the same or different to the antagonist of the a 4 integrin preferably the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin. If the antagonist is the same, a single antagonist may be used to inhibit the activity of both the ag integrin and the a 4 integrin. Separate antagonists may be used either simultaneously or sequentially to inhibit the ag integrin, preferably the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin and the a 4 integrin, preferably the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin.
  • the ag integrin preferably the agPi integrin and the a 4 integrin preferably the ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin are activated prior to the interaction of the integrin antagonist.
  • the antagonist preferably interacts with intrinsically activated integrins. Therefore, it is desirable that the ag integrin is intrinsically activated.
  • the agPi integrin is intrinsically activated.
  • the antagonist of an ag integrin preferably the antagonist of agPi integrin, more preferably a agPia 4 Pi integrin comprises a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
  • X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO 2 -;
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of H and CrC 4 alkyl
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 7 ;
  • R 4 when R 4 is H then R 5 is -OR 7 and when R 4 is -OR 6 then R 5 is H;
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 8 , -C(0)R 9 and -C(O)NR 10 R 1 1 ;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)-(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 10 and R 1 1 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 4 is H
  • R 5 is -OR 7 ;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 7 are as defined in Formula (I).
  • the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (II):
  • X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -S0 2 -;
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of H and C1-C4 alkyl
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 1 3 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of Ci -C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 1 3 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -0(CrC 4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n 1 or 2.
  • R 7 is selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
  • Exemplary C1-C4 alkyl as described herein for groups of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be linear or branched.
  • C1-C4 alkyl may be selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl and tert-butyl.
  • R 7 may be methyl or tert-butyl, such that -OR 7 is -OCH3 or -OC(CH 3 ) 3 .
  • R 7 is -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 .
  • R 12 may be selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci- C 4 alkyl), -C(O)-(C C 4 alkyl), -C(O)O-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN, and n is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 7 is -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , where R 12 may be selected from the group consisting of -CN, -O(C C4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl, and n is 1 or 2.
  • R 7 is -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , where:
  • R 12 is an optionally substituted tetrazolyl (preferably 5-tetrazolyl), and n is 1 .
  • R 7 is -C(O)R 13 .
  • R 13 may be selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 13 may be an optionally substituted 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl ring.
  • Exemplary cycloalkyl rings may be cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
  • R 13 may be an optionally substituted aryl ring.
  • An exemplary aryl ring is phenyl.
  • R 13 may be an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring.
  • An exemplary heteroaryl ring is pyrrolyl.
  • R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 .
  • R 14 and R 15 may each be independently selected from the group consisting of C1 -C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl.
  • R 14 and R 15 are each ethyl or iso-propyl. In one specific embodiment of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , one of R 14 and R 15 is methyl and the other of R 14 and R 15 is phenyl.
  • a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached may form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • Particular heterocycloalkyi rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
  • R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , where R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl ring.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, -CN, -0(CrC 4 alkyl) and 5-tetrazolyl;
  • R 13 is 2-pyrrolyl
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently C1-C4 alkyl or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl or morpholinyl ring;
  • n 1 or 2.
  • X is -S0 2 -.
  • the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (III):
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of H and Ci-C 4 alkyl
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 7 ;
  • R 4 when R 4 is H then R 5 is -OR 7 and when R 4 is -OR 6 then R 5 is H;
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 8 , -C(O)R 9 and -C(O)NR 10 R 1 1 ;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(O)R 13 and -C(O)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(O)-(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 10 and R 11 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 4 is H and R 5 is OR 7 to provide a compound of Formula (Ilia):
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are as defined in Formula (III);
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of C1 -C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl (preferably methyl or tert-butyl), -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and - C(0)NR 14 R 15 ; wherein
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring;
  • n is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1 , 2 and 3.
  • R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , where R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • Particular heterocycloalkyi rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
  • X is -S0 2 -
  • R 4 is H
  • R 5 is -OR 7 , where R 7 is -C(O)NR 14 R 15 and R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinyl ring.
  • the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (I I lb):
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are as defined herein.
  • R 1 is an optionally substituted aryl. In some embodiments R 1 is an optionally substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is phenyl substituted with at least one halogen group.
  • Halogen substituent groups may be selected from the group consisting of chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo, preferably chloro.
  • R 1 is phenyl substituted with a plurality of halogen groups.
  • the halogen substituent groups may be positioned at the 3- and 5- positions of the phenyl ring.
  • a compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (IVa) or (IVb):
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 3 is H.
  • the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (V):
  • X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 6 ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR 7 ;
  • R 4 when R 4 is H then R 5 is -OR 7 and when R 4 is -OR 6 then R 5 is H;
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 8 , -C(O)R 9 and -C(O)NR 10 R 11 ;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(O)R 13 and -C(O)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)-(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 10 and R 1 1 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • optionally substituted alkyl selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 4 is H and R 5 is OR 7 to provide a compound of Formula (Va):
  • R 2 and R 7 are as defined in Formula (V).
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of C C 4 alkyl (preferably methyl or tert-butyl), -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ; wherein R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 and n are as defined herein for Formula (V).
  • R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , where R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring.
  • the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl ring.
  • Particular heterocycloalkyl rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
  • X is -SO2-.
  • X is -SO 2 -
  • R 3 and R 4 are each H and R 5 is -OR 7 , where R 7 is -C(O)NR 14 R 15 and R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinyl ring.
  • the compound of Formula V) may have a structure of Formula (Vb):
  • R 1 is an optionally substituted aryl, preferably an optionally substituted phenyl.
  • the optional substituent is preferably at least one halogen group selected from the group consisting of chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo, preferably chloro.
  • R 1 is phenyl substituted with at least one halogen group. In some embodiments, R 1 is phenyl substituted with a plurality of halogen groups. The halogen substituent groups are preferably positioned at the 3- and 5- positions of the phenyl ring.
  • a compound of Formula (V) may have a structure of Formula (Via) or (Vlb):
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C 4 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 , -C(0)R 13 and -C(0)NR 14 R 15 ;
  • R 12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(C C 4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C 4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C 4 alkyl) and -CN;
  • R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC 4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
  • R 14 and R 15 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, tert-butyl, -(CH 2 ) n -R 12 where R 12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -CH 3 , -C(CH 3 ) 3 and optionally substituted heteroaryl (preferably 5-tetrazolyl), and n is 1 or 2.
  • R 7 is -C(0)R 13 , where R 13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi (preferably cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl), optionally substituted aryl (preferably phenyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl (preferably pyrrolyl).
  • R 7 is -C(0)NR 14 R 15 , where R 14 and R 15 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring.
  • the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring.
  • Particular heterocycloalkyl rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
  • a compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (VII):
  • R 2 and R 3 are as defined in Formula (I).
  • R 3 is H, which provides compounds of the following formula (VIII):
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group.
  • R 2 is H, which provides a compound following formula (IX):
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of the following formula:
  • R 2 may in some embodiments be a substituent group.
  • R 2 is a substituent group selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, hydroxy, amino and azido, or R 2 is a substituent having structure of Formula (A):
  • Y is optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl- C(0)NH-;
  • linker is selected from the group consisting of -(CH 2 ) P - and -(CH 2 CH 2 0) p - or any combination thereof;
  • p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4.
  • Z is a fluorophore (preferably a rhodamine group).
  • R 2 is an optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • Suitable optionally substituted heteroaryl may comprise from 5 to 10 ring atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, and S.
  • the optionally substituted heteroaryl may be monocyclic or bicyclic.
  • R 2 may be a heteroaryl selected from the group consisting of pyrazole, imidazole, 1 ,2,3-triazole, 1 ,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indazole, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydroindazole and benzimidazole,
  • R 2 is an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi.
  • Suitable optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi may comprise from 3 to 10 ring atoms, preferably from 4 to 8 ring atoms, and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, and S.
  • the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi may be monocyclic or bicyclic.
  • R 2 may be an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, azepane, morpholine and thiomorpholine.
  • R 2 may be optionally substituted piperidine.
  • the piperidine may be substituted with at least one C1-C4 alkyl substituent group.
  • the C1-C4 alkyl substituent group may be methyl.
  • R 2 may be selected from the group consisting of 2- methylpiperidine, 3-methylpiperidine, 4-methylpiperidine, 3,5-dimethylpiperidine and 3,3-dimethylpiperidine.
  • R 2 When R 2 is a optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi group, R 2 may be linked to the pyrrolidine ring of the compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (VIb), (VII) or (VIII), via a heteroatom on the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • R 2 may be linked to the pyrrolidine ring of the compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (VIb), (VII) or (VIII), via a heteroatom on the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyi ring.
  • R 2 is a heteroaryl selected from the group consisting of pyrazole, imidazole, 1 ,2,3- triazole, 1 ,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indazole, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindazole and benzimidazole, or when R 2 is a optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, azepane, morpholine and thiomorpholine, then R 2 is covalently linked to the remainder of the compound via the nitrogen (N) heteroatom of the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group.
  • N nitrogen
  • R 2 is a substituent group having structure of Formula (A):
  • Y is optionally substituted heteroaryl; or optionally substituted heteroaryl- C(0)NH-;
  • linker is selected from the group consisting of -(CH 2 ) P - and -(CH 2 CH 2 0) p - or any combination thereof;
  • p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4.
  • Z is a fluorophore (preferably a rhodamine group).
  • Y may be selected from the group consisting of triazole or triazole-C(0)NH-.
  • Y may be triazole or triazole-C(0)NH-, such that the structure of Formula (A) is given by Formula (A1 ) or (A2):
  • linker may be selected from the group consisting of -(CH 2 ) P - and -(CH 2 CH 2 0) p - or any combination thereof, wherein p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4.
  • linker may be given by Formula (A3) or (A4):
  • p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4.
  • Z is a rhodamine fluorophor which is selected from the following group:
  • a compound of Formula (I) has the following structu
  • a compound of Formula (I) has the following structure:
  • the pyrrolidine carbamate moiety in compounds of formulae described herein is important for ensuring a high binding affinity to an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin, more particularly to an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin, or an active portion thereof. It is further believed that the carboxylic acid functionality is essential for antagonist activity.
  • a number of terms are used which are well known to a skilled addressee. Nevertheless for the purposes of clarity a number of terms are defined as follows.
  • the term "optionally substituted” as used throughout the specification denotes that the group may or may not be further substituted or fused (so as to form a condensed polycyclic system), with one or more non-hydrogen substituent groups.
  • R e and R f , R 9 and R h are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, CrC 4 alkyl, d-Ci 2 haloalkyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkenyl, C 2 -Ci 2 alkynyl, C Ci 0 heteroalkyl, C3-C6cycloalkyl, C3-Ci 2 cycloalkenyl, Cs-Ceheterocycloalkyl, Ci - Ci 2 heterocycloalkenyl, Cearyl, and Ci-Csheteroaryl, or R e and R f , when taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic or heterocyclic ring system with 3 to 12 ring atoms.
  • optional substituents may be selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, -C(0)R e , -C(0)OR e , -C(0)NR e R f , -OR e , -OC(0)NR e R f , OC(0)R e and acyl, wherein R e and R f are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-C 4 alkyl, C3-C6cycloalkyl, Cs-Ceheterocycloalkyl, Cearyl, and Ci-Csheteroaryl, or R e and R f , when taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic or heterocyclic ring system with 3 to 12 ring atoms.
  • Alkyl as a group or part of a group refers to a straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, preferably a Ci-Ci 2 alkyl, more preferably a C Cio alkyl, most preferably CrC 4 unless otherwise noted.
  • suitable straight and branched Ci-C 4 alkyl substituents include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 2-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl and t-butyl.
  • the group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
  • Aryl as a group or part of a group denotes (i) an optionally substituted monocyclic, or fused polycyclic, aromatic carbocycle (ring structure having ring atoms that are all carbon) preferably having from 5 to 12 atoms per ring.
  • aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, and the like; (ii) an optionally substituted partially saturated bicyclic aromatic carbocyclic moiety in which a phenyl and a Cs-7 cycloalkyl or Cs-7 cycloalkenyl group are fused together to form a cyclic structure, such as tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl or indanyl.
  • the group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
  • an aryl group is a C6-C18 aryl group.
  • a “bond” is a linkage between atoms in a compound or molecule.
  • the bond is a single bond.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a saturated monocyclic or fused or spiro polycyclic, carbocycle preferably containing from 3 to 9 carbons per ring, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like, unless otherwise specified. It includes monocyclic systems (such as cyclohexyl), bicyclic systems such as decalin, and polycyclic systems such as adamantane.
  • a cycloalkyl group typically is a C3-C12 alkyl group. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
  • Heteroaryl either alone or part of a group refers to groups containing an aromatic ring (preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring) having one or more heteroatoms as ring atoms in the aromatic ring with the remainder of the ring atoms being carbon atoms. Suitable heteroatoms may be selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur. The group may be a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl group.
  • heteroaryl examples include thiophene, benzothiophene, benzofuran, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, naphtho[2,3- b]thiophene, furan, isoindolizine, xantholene, phenoxatine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, tetrazole, indole, isoindole, 1 H- indazole, purine, quinoline, isoquinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, cinnoline, carbazole, phenanthridine, acridine, phenazine, thiazole, isothiazole, phenothiazine, oxazole, isooxazole, furazane, phen
  • a heteroaryl group is typically a C1-C18 heteroaryl group.
  • the group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
  • Heterocycloalkyl refers to a saturated monocyclic, bicyclic, or polycyclic ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, preferably from 1 to 3 heteroatoms in at least one ring. Each ring is preferably from 3- to 10- membered, more preferably 4- to 7-membered.
  • suitable heterocycloalkyl include pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl, piperidyl, piperazyl, tetrahydropyranyl and morpholino.
  • the group may be a terminal group or a bridging group. It is understood that included in the family of compounds of Formula (I) are isomeric forms including diastereomers, enantiomers and tautomers, and geometrical isomers in "E” or “Z” configuration or a mixture of E and Z isomers. It is also understood that some isomeric forms such as diastereomers, enantiomers, and geometrical isomers can be separated by physical and/or chemical methods and by those skilled in the art. For those compounds where there is the possibility of geometric isomerism the applicant has drawn the isomer that the compound is thought to be although it will be appreciated that the other isomer may be the correct structural assignment.
  • Some of the compounds of the disclosed embodiments may exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and/or mixtures of enantiomers and /or diastereomers. All such single stereoisomers, racemates and mixtures thereof, are intended to be within the scope of the subject matter described and claimed.
  • Formula (I) is intended to cover, where applicable, solvated as well as unsolvated forms of the compounds.
  • each formula includes compounds having the indicated structure, including the hydrated as well as the non-hydrated forms.
  • Formula (I) is further intended to encompass pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to salts that retain the desired biological activity of the above-identified compounds, and include pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts and base addition salts.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared from an inorganic acid or from an organic acid. Examples of such inorganic acids are hydrochloric, sulfuric, and phosphoric acid.
  • Appropriate organic acids may be selected from aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aromatic, heterocyclic, carboxylic, and sulfonic classes of organic acids, examples of which are formic, acetic, propanoic, succinic, glycolic, gluconic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, fumaric, maleic, alkyl sulfonic, and arylsulfonic.
  • base addition salts may be prepared by ways well known in the art using organic or inorganic bases.
  • suitable organic bases include simple amines such as methylamine, ethylamine, triethylamine and the like.
  • suitable inorganic bases include NaOH, KOH, and the like.
  • a method for enhancing release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an ctg integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
  • the HSC dislodge from the BM stem cell binding ligand they are no longer anchored to the BM and available to be released from the BM and enter a cell cycle toward proliferation and differentiation. Alternatively, they can remain in the BM and enter a cell cycle in the BM.
  • the present invention there is provided a method for enhancing mobilization of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell niche in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
  • the methods are conducted in the presence or absence of G-CSF.
  • the methods are conducted in the absence of G-CSF.
  • G-CSF is the most extensively used mobilization agent for HSC, its drawbacks include potentially toxic side effects, a relatively long course of treatment (5-7 days of consecutive injections), and variable responsiveness of patients. Therefore, an advantage of the invention is that effective mobilization can occur in the absence of G-CSF which substantially can avoid the toxic side effects.
  • “Haematopoietic stem cells” as used in the present invention means multipotent stem cells that are capable of eventually differentiating into all blood cells including, erythrocytes, leukocytes, megakaryocytes, and platelets. This may involve an intermediate stage of differentiation into progenitor cells or blast cells.
  • haematopoietic stem cells “HSC”, “haematopoietic progenitors”, “HPC”, “progenitor cells” or “blast cells” are used interchangeably in the present invention and describe HSCs with reduced differentiation potential, but are still capable of maturing into different cells of a specific lineage, such as myeloid or lymphoid lineage.
  • “Haematopoietic progenitors” include erythroid burst forming units, granulocyte, erythroid, macrophage, megakaryocyte colony forming units, granulocyte, erythroid, macrophage, and granulocyte macrophage colony-forming units.
  • the present invention relates to enhancing the dislodgment of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand. Once dislodged, the cells can be released from the BM stem cell niche where they can remain or preferably be released and mobilized to the PB. These cells have haematopoietic reconstitution capacity.
  • the present invention provides a method to enhance mobilization of HSC assisted by the dislodgement of the HSC from the BM stem cell binding ligand preferably nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche or from the central medullary cavity.
  • the HSC are mobilized from the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche as it is these cells that have been shown to give greater long term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity.
  • LSK BM derived progenitor enriched Lin-Sca-1 +ckit+
  • LSKSLAM stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells
  • LSKSLAM stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells
  • the cells that are dislodged, released or mobilized are endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34 + , CD38 + , CD90 + , CD133 + , CD34 + CD38 " cells, lineage-committed CD34 " cells, or CD34 + CD38 + cells.
  • the present invention may be conducted in vivo or ex vivo. That is the antagonist of a 9, preferably an antagonist of ⁇ 9 ⁇ , more preferably an antagonist of ⁇ 9 ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ can be administered to a subject in need in vivo or to an ex vivo sample to mobilize HSC from the BM.
  • Subject as used herein includes all animals, including mammals and other animals, including, but not limited to, companion animals, farm animals and zoo animals.
  • the term “animal” can include any living multi-cellular vertebrate organisms, a category that includes, for example, a mammal, a bird, a simian, a dog, a cat, a horse, a cow, a rodent, and the like.
  • the term “mammal” includes both human and non- human mammals.
  • the present invention relates to enhancing HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization.
  • "Enhancement,” “enhance” or “enhancing” as used herein refers to an improvement in the performance of or other physiologically beneficial increase in a particular parameter of a cell or organism.
  • enhancement of a phenomenon may be quantified as a decrease in the measurements of a specific parameter.
  • migration of stem cells may be measured as a reduction in the number of stem cells circulating in the circulatory system, but this nonetheless may represent an enhancement in the migration of these cells to areas of the body where they may perform or facilitate a beneficial physiologic result, including, but not limited to, differentiating into cells that replace or correct lost or damaged function.
  • enhancement may be measured as an increase of any one cell type in the peripheral blood as a result of migration of the HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • Enhancement may refer to a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45% or greater than 50% reduction in the number of circulating stem cells or in the alternative may represent a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45% or greater than 50% increase in the number of circulating stem cells.
  • Enhancement of stem cell migration may result in or be measured by a decrease in a population of the cells of a non-haematopoietic lineage, such as a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%,55%, 60%, 70%, 75% or greater decrease in the population of cells or the response of the population of cells.
  • an enhanced parameter may be considered as the trafficking of stem cells.
  • the enhanced parameter is the release of stem cells from a tissue of origin such as the BM.
  • an enhanced parameter is the migration of stem cells.
  • the parameter is the differentiation of stem cells.
  • the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin antagonist is administered intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, transdermally, transmucosally or intraperitoneally; optionally the antagonist is administered intravenously or subcutaneously.
  • compositions for use in enhancing dislodgement of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche in a subject comprising an antagonist of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin as herein described. More preferably, the antagonist is an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin antagonist as herein described. Most preferably, the antagonist is an ⁇ 4 ⁇ ⁇ 9 ⁇ antagonist as herein described.
  • the composition enhances release of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche. More preferably, the composition enhances mobility or mobilization of HSC from a BM stem cell niche to the PB.
  • the composition may be a pharmaceutical composition further including a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein may be provided in the composition alone or in combination with a further antagonist of ctg integrin, a 4 integrin, ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin , ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin or it may be a combined antagonist of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ - ⁇ / ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin.
  • the antagonists may be the same or different, but will all act as antagonists of at least the ctg integrin.
  • an antagonist of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin as described herein in the preparation of a medicament for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a patient.
  • compositions and pharmaceutical compositions which include antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein as active ingredients for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand.
  • the release of the HSC is enhanced.
  • the HSC mobilization is enhanced.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions typically include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier includes saline, solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration that are known to the skilled addressee.
  • Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions, e.g., growth factors such as G-CSF.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions are typically formulated to be compatible with the intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, transdermal (topical), transmucosal, intraperitoneal and rectal administration.
  • routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, transdermal (topical), transmucosal, intraperitoneal and rectal administration.
  • the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein are administered subcutaneously.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are formulated to target delivery of the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein to the bone marrow, preferably to the BM stem cell niche, and more preferably to the endosteal niche of the BM stem cell niche.
  • the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein may be formulated in liposomes, nanosuspensions and inclusion complexes (e.g. with cyclodextrins), which can effect more targeted delivery to the BM while reducing side effects.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
  • the ctg integrin antagonist is administered in the absence of G-CSF.
  • ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonists as herein described to enhance dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in the BM stem cell niche allows for the cells to eventually mobilize to the PB for further collection.
  • the cells may naturally mobilize and egress from the BM or they may be stimulated to mobilize by the use of other HSC mobilizing agents such as, but not limited to interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF).
  • HSC mobilizing agents such as, but not limited to interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF).
  • the cells once harvested can be returned to the body to supplement or replenish a patient's haematopoietic progenitor cell population (homologous or autologous transplantation) or alternatively be transplanted to another patient to replenish their haematopoietic progenitor cell population (heterologous or allogeneic transplantation).
  • haematopoietic progenitor cell population homologous or autologous transplantation
  • heterologous or allogeneic transplantation can be advantageous, in the instance following a period where an individual has undergone chemotherapy.
  • there are certain genetic conditions such as thalassemias, sickle cell anemia, Dyskeratosis congenital, Shwachman-Diamond syndrome, and Diamond- Blackfan anemia wherein HSC and HPC numbers are decreased.
  • the methods of the invention in enhancing HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization may be useful and applicable.
  • the recipient of a bone marrow transplant may have limited bone marrow reserve such as elderly subjects or subjects previously exposed to an immune depleting treatment such as chemotherapy. They may have a decreased blood cell level or is at risk for developing a decreased blood cell level as compared to a control blood cell level.
  • control blood cell level refers to an average level of blood cells in a subject prior to or in the substantial absence of an event that changes blood cell levels in the subject.
  • An event that changes blood cell levels in a subject includes, for example, anaemia, trauma, chemotherapy, bone marrow transplant and radiation therapy.
  • the subject has anaemia or blood loss due to, for example, trauma.
  • an effective amount of an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin antagonist such as an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist, more preferably a ⁇ 9 ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist is administered to a donor to induce dislodgement, release or preferably mobilization of HSC from the BM and release and mobilize to the PB.
  • an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin antagonist such as an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist, more preferably a ⁇ 9 ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist is administered to a donor to induce dislodgement, release or preferably mobilization of HSC from the BM and release and mobilize to the PB.
  • the HSC can be isolated therefrom, using a standard method such as apheresis or leukapheresis.
  • the effective amount of the ctg integrin antagonist is in the range of 25 - 1000 ⁇ g kg body weight, more preferably 50 - 500 ⁇ g kg body weight, most preferably 50 - 250 ⁇ g kg body weight.
  • the effective amount may be selected from the group including 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 1 10, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240 or 250 ⁇ g/kg body weight.
  • Dislodgement, release or preferably mobilization may occur immediately, depending on the amount of ctg integrin antagonist used.
  • the HSC may be harvested in approximately 1 hours' time after administration.
  • the actual time and amount of the ctg integrin antagonist may vary depending upon a variety of factors, including but not limited to the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect) and the route of administration.
  • physiological condition of the subject including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect
  • One skilled in the clinical and pharmacological arts will be able to determine an effective amount through routine experimentation and use of control curves.
  • control curve is considered to refer to statistical and mathematically relevant curves generated through the measurement of HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization characteristics of different concentrations of ctg integrin antagonist under identical conditions, and wherein the cells can be harvested and counted over regular time intervals. These "control curves" as considered in the present invention can be used as one method to estimate different concentrations for administering in subsequent occasions.
  • the terms “harvesting haematopoietic stem cells”, “harvesting haematopoietic progenitor cells”, “harvesting HSC” or “harvesting HPC” are considered to refer to the separation of cells from the PB and are considered as techniques to which the person skilled in the art would be aware.
  • the cells are optionally collected, separated, and optionally further expanded generating even larger populations of HSC and differentiated progeny.
  • a cell composition comprising HSC obtained from a method as described herein said method comprising administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as herein described to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • an antagonist of ctg integrin as herein described to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • the cell composition will be enriched with cells of the endosteal niche and are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group comprising CD34 + , CD38 + , CD90 + , CD133 + , CD34 + CD38 " cells, lineage-committed CD34 " cells, or CD34 + CD38 + cells.
  • a method for the treatment of haematological disorders comprising administering a cell composition comprising HSC obtained from a method as described herein said method comprising administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • a method for the treatment of haematological disorders in a subject comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to the subject to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
  • the haematological disorder is a haemaopoietic neoplastic disorder and the method involves chemosensitizing the HSC to alter susceptibility of the HSC, such that a chemotherapeutic agent, having become ineffective, becomes more effective.
  • a long standing issue in the treatment of leukemia is the concept that malignant cells in a dormant state are likely to evade the effects of cytotoxic agents, rendering them capable of driving relapse. Whilst much effort has gone into understanding the control of cancer cell dormancy, very little has concentrated on the role of the microenvironment and in particular the bone marrow stem cell niche. Recently, data has emerged demonstrating that the extracellular matrix molecule osteopontin, known to anchor normal haematopoietic stem cells in the bone marrow, also plays a role in supporting leukaemic cell, in particular acute lymphoblastic leukaemia (ALL), dormancy by anchoring these in key regions of the bone marrow microenvironment.
  • ALL acute lymphoblastic leukaemia
  • integrin ⁇ 4 ⁇ shows that an agent that competes with the interaction of ctgPi and its extracellular matrix ligands will induce these cells into cell cycle, rendering them vulnerable to cytotoxic chemotherapy.
  • the methods described herein include in some embodiments methods for the treatment of subjects with haematological disorders who are in need of increased numbers of stem cells.
  • the subject is scheduled to or intends to donate stem cells such as HSC e.g., for use in heterologous or autologous transplantation.
  • the methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein, to a subject who is in need of, or who has been determined to be in need of, such treatment.
  • Administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 integrin preferably an ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ antagonist, more preferably an antagonist of a ⁇ 9 ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin as described herein for the treatment of such subjects will result in an increased number and/or frequency of HSC in the PB or BM.
  • Treatment refers to both therapeutic treatment and prophylactic or preventative measures, wherein the aim is to prevent or slow down (lessen) the targeted condition, disease or disorder (collectively “ailment”) even if the treatment is ultimately unsuccessful.
  • Those in need of treatment may include those already with the ailment as well as those prone to have the ailment or those in whom the ailment is to be prevented.
  • an "effective amount” is an amount sufficient to effect a significant increase or decrease in the number and/or frequency of HSC in the PB or BM.
  • An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages.
  • “Therapeutically effective amount” refers to the quantity of a specified composition, or active agent in the composition, sufficient to achieve a desired effect in a subject being treated. For example, this can be the amount effective for enhancing migration of HSC that replenish, repair, or rejuvenate tissue.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount effective for enhancing trafficking of HSC, such as increasing release of HSC, as can be demonstrated by elevated levels of circulating stem cells in the bloodstream.
  • the "therapeutically effective amount” is an amount effective for enhancing homing and migration of HSC from the circulatory system to various tissues or organs, as can be demonstrated be decreased level of circulating HSC in the bloodstream and/or expression of surface markers related to homing and migration.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may vary depending upon a variety of factors, including but not limited to the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect) and the route of administration.
  • physiological condition of the subject including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect
  • route of administration including route of administration.
  • One skilled in the clinical and pharmacological arts will be able to determine a therapeutically effective amount through routine experimentation.
  • compositions can be administered one from one or more times per day to one or more times per week; including once every other day.
  • treatment of a subject with an effective amount of the compositions described herein can include a single treatment or a series of treatments. In some embodiments, such administration will result in an increase of about 10-200- fold in the number of HSC in the PB.
  • Dosage, toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of the compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures, e.g., in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Compounds that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the antagonists of ag integrin as described herein that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • IC50 i.e., the concentration of the antagonists of ag integrin as described herein that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms
  • levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • the methods of treatment described herein include administering another HSC mobilizing agent, e.g., an agent selected from the group consisting of, but not limited to, interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF).
  • another HSC mobilizing agent e.g., an agent selected from the group consisting of, but not limited to, interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF).
  • the ag integrin antagonist may be administered with G-CSF.
  • the methods include administering the isolated stem cells to a subject, such as reintroducing the cells into the same subject or transplanting the cells into a second subject, e.g., an HLA type-matched second subject, an allograft
  • the present invention includes administering an ag integrin antagonist directly to a patient to mobilize their own HSC or using HSC from another donor treated with an ag integrin antagonist from which HSC have been harvested.
  • the subject administered an antagonist of ag integrin as described herein is healthy.
  • the subject is suffering from a disease or physiological condition, such as immunosuppression, chronic illness, traumatic injury, degenerative disease, infection, or combinations thereof.
  • the subject may suffer from a disease or condition of the skin, digestive system, nervous system, lymph system, cardiovascular system, endocrine system, or combinations thereof.
  • the subject suffers from osteoporosis, Alzheimer's disease, cardiac infarction, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, multiple sclerosis, cirrhosis of the liver, or combinations thereof.
  • compositions and methods find therapeutic utility in the treatment of, among other things, skeletal tissues such as bone, cartilage, tendon and ligament, as well as degenerative diseases, such as Parkinson's and diabetes. Enhancing the release, circulation, homing and/or migration of stem cells from the blood to the tissues may lead to more efficient delivery of HSC to a defective site for increased repair efficiency.
  • subjects that can usefully be treated using the HSC, PB or BM include any subjects who can be normally treated with a bone marrow or stem cell transplant, e.g., subjects who have cancers, e.g., neuroblastoma (cancer that arises in immature nerve cells and affects mostly infants and children), myelodysplasia, myelofibrosis, breast cancer, renal cell carcinoma, or multiple myeloma.
  • the cells can be transplanted into subjects who have cancers that are resistant to treatment with radiation therapy or chemotherapy, e.g., to restore stem cells that were destroyed by high doses of chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy used to treat the cancers or non-responders to G-CSF treatment to mobilize HSC.
  • the subject has a haematopoietic neoplastic disorder.
  • haematopoietic neoplastic disorders includes diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of haematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof.
  • the diseases arise from poorly differentiated acute leukemias, e.g., erythroblastic leukemia and acute megakaryoblastic leukemia.
  • myeloid disorders include, but are not limited to, acute promyeloid leukemia (APML), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML); lymphoid malignancies include, but are not limited to acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL) which includes B-lineage ALL and T- lineage ALL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia (PLL), hairy cell leukemia (HLL) and Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM).
  • ALL acute lymphoblastic leukemia
  • ALL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • PLL prolymphocytic leukemia
  • HLL hairy cell leukemia
  • WM Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia
  • malignant lymphomas include, but are not Limited to Hodgkin's Disease and Medium/High grade (aggressive) Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma and variants thereof, peripheral T cell lymphomas, adult T cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATL), cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL), large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGF), Hodgkin's disease and Reed- Sternberg disease.
  • the methods will include administering the cell compositions, or dislodging, releasing or mobilizing stem cells to restore stem cells that were destroyed by high doses of chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy, e.g., therapy used to treat the disorders.
  • the HSC are dislodged, released or mobilized from the BM stem cell niche and chemosensitized whilst entering a cell cycle either in the BM or the PB.
  • the haematopoietic neoplastic disorder is ALL.
  • the BM, PB or HSC are used to treat a subject who has an autoimmune disease, e.g., multiple sclerosis (MS), myasthenia gravis, autoimmune neuropathy, scleroderma, aplastic anemia, and systemic lupus erythematosus.
  • MS multiple sclerosis
  • myasthenia gravis autoimmune neuropathy
  • scleroderma aplastic anemia
  • systemic lupus erythematosus e.g., multiple sclerosis (MS), myasthenia gravis
  • autoimmune neuropathy e.g., scleroderma
  • aplastic anemia e.g., aplastic anemia
  • systemic lupus erythematosus e.g., multiple sclerosis (MS), myasthenia gravis, autoimmune neuropathy, scleroderma, aplastic anemia, and systemic lupus erythematosus.
  • the subject who is treated has a non-malignant disorder such as aplastic anemia, a hemoglobinopathy, including sickle cell anemia, or an immune deficiency disorder.
  • the present invention further provides a dosing regimen.
  • the dosing regimen is dependent on the severity and responsiveness of a disease state to be treated, with the course of treatment lasting from a single administration to repeated administration over several days and/or weeks.
  • the dosing regimen is dependent on the number of circulating CD34+ HSCs in the peripheral blood stream of a subject.
  • the dosing regimen is dependent on the number of circulating bone marrow-derived stem cells in the peripheral blood stream of a subject. For instance, the degree of mobility of the HSC from the BM may be dependent on the number of HSC already circulating in the PB.
  • the present invention further provides a method of enhancing the trafficking of HSC in a subject said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as herein described to a subject.
  • the level of trafficking of HSC relates to the number of circulating CD34 + HSCs in the peripheral blood of a subject.
  • the level of trafficking of HSC relates to the number of circulating bone marrow-derived HSCs in the peripheral blood of a subject.
  • the present invention further provides a method of inducing a transient increase in the population of circulating HSC, such as endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34 + , CD38 + , CD90 + , CD133 + , CD34 + CD38 " cells, lineage-committed CD34 " cells, or CD34 + CD38 + cells following administration of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to a subject.
  • providing an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to a subject will enhance release of that subject's HSC within a certain time period, such as less than 12 days, less than 6 days, less than 3 days, less than 2 days, or less than 1 day, less than 12 hours, less than 6 hours, less than about 4 hours, less than about 2 hours, or less than about 1 hour following administration.
  • administration of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein results in the release of HSC into the circulation from about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes following administration.
  • the release of HSC will be about 60 minutes following administration.
  • released HSC enter the circulatory system and increase the number of circulating HSC within the subject's body.
  • the percentage increase in the number of circulating HSC compared to a normal baseline may be about 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or about 100% or greater than about 100% increase as compared to a control.
  • the control is a base line value from the same subject.
  • the control is the number of circulating stem cells or HSC in an untreated subject, or in a subject treated with a placebo or a pharmacological carrier.
  • the cells once harvested provide a cell composition that can be returned to the body to supplement or replenish a subject's haematopoietic progenitor cell population or alternatively be transplanted to another subject to replenish their haematopoietic progenitor cell population. This can be advantageous, in the instance following a period where an individual has undergone chemotherapy.
  • the method relates specifically to transplanting a subset of HSC. These cells have haematopoietic reconstitution capacity and reside in BM in the stem cell niche.
  • the present invention provides a method to transplant the HSC from the stem cell niche preferably nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche or from the central medullary cavity. More preferably, the HSC are transplanted from the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche as it is these cells that have been shown to give greater long term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity.
  • the cells that are transplanted are found in the stem cell niche, more preferably the central or endosteal niche.
  • the equivalent type of cells that may be transplanted may be found in murine populations selected from the group including BM derived progenitor enriched Lin- Sca-1 +ckit+ (herein referred to as LSK) cells or stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells (herein referred to as LSKSLAM).
  • the cells that are transplanted are endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34 + , CD38 + , CD90 + , CD133 + , CD34 + CD38 " cells, lineage-committed CD34 " cells, or CD34 + CD38 + cells.
  • Flow cytometric analysis was performed using an LSR II (BD Biosciences) as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59.
  • R-BC154 was detected at 585 nm and excited with the yellow-green laser (561 nm).
  • BM and PB analysis up to 5 ⁇ 10 6 cells were analysed at a rate of 10-20k cell events/sec.
  • PB LSKSLAM For analysis of PB LSKSLAM, up to 1 10 6 events were saved.
  • Cell sorting was performed on a Cytopeia Influx (BD) as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al.
  • BD Cytopeia Influx
  • Stable LN18 cells ((ATCC number: CRL-2610) over-expressing integrin ⁇ 4 ⁇ (LN18 ⁇ 4 ⁇ ) or ⁇ 9 ⁇ (LN18 ⁇ 9 ⁇ )) were generated by retroviral transduction using the pMSCV-hlTGA4-IRES-hlTGB1 and pMSCV-hlTGA9-IRES-hlTGB1 vectors as previously described in J Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59 and were maintained in DMEM supplemented with 2mM L-glutamate in 10% FBS.
  • Transduced cells were selected by two rounds of FACS using 2.5 pg ml -1 PE-Cy5-conjugated mouse-anti-human a 4 antibody (BD Bioscience) or 20 pg ml -1 of mouse-anti- human ⁇ 9 ⁇ antibody (Millipore) in PBS-2% FBS, followed by 0.5 pg ml -1 of PE-conjugated goat-anti-mouse IgG (BD Bio-science). Silencing of a 4 expression in LN18 and LN18 ⁇ 9 ⁇ cells was performed as described above using pSM2c-shlTGA4 (Open Biosystems). a 4 -silenced LN18 cells (control cell line; LN18 SiA4) and LN18 ⁇ 9 ⁇ (LN18 agPiSiA4) were negatively selected for a 4 expression using FACS.
  • LN18 SiA4 control cell line
  • LN18 a 4 Pi and LN18 ctgPicells were stained with 2.5 pg ml -1 of mouse-anti-human a 4 antibody (BD Bioscience), 4 pg ml -1 of mouse-anti- human ctgPi antibody (Millipore) or 4 pg ml -1 of mouse isotype control (BD Bioscience) in PBS-2% FBS for one hour, followed by 5 pg ml -1 of Alexa Fluor 594 conjugated goat-anti-mouse lgG1 for 1 h and then washed with PBS-2% FBS three times.
  • BM and PB cells were immunolabelled with a lineage cocktail (anti-Terl 19, anti-B220, anti-CD3, anti-Gr-1 , anti-Mac-1 ), anti-Sca-1 , anti-c-kit, anti-CD48 and anti-CD150.
  • lineage analysis cells were stained separately for T-cells using anti-CD3, B-cells using anti-B220, macrophages using anti-Mac-1 and granulocytes using anti-Gr-1 .
  • lineage analysis was also performed using a cocktail containing anti-CD3/B220 (PB conjugated) and anti-B220/Gr1/Mac-1 (AF647 conjugated), whereby B220 + cells were identified as +/+ cells, CD3 + cells are +/- and Gr1/Mac-1 + cells are -/+ populations.
  • Eppendorf vials containing ⁇ 4 ⁇ or ⁇ 9 ⁇ LN18 cells were treated with 50 nM of R-BC154 (100 ⁇ in TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI 2 -MgCI 2 or 1 mM MnCI 2 at 37 ⁇ until for 30 min, washed once with the re levant binding buffer and dry pelleted.
  • the cells were treated with 500 nM of an unlabelled competing inhibitor (100 ⁇ , in TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI 2 -MgCI 2 or 1 mM MnCI 2 ) at 37 ⁇ for the times indicated (0, 2.5, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60 min).
  • Eppendorf vials containing ⁇ 4 ⁇ or ⁇ 9 ⁇ LN18 cells (0.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells) in 50 ⁇ TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI 2 -MgCI 2 or 1 mM MnCI 2 were pre-activated in a heating block for 20 min at 37 ⁇ .
  • the cells were washed once TBS-2% FBS (with relevant cations), pelleted by centrifugation and resuspended (200 ⁇ ) in the relevant binding buffer for flow cytometric analysis.
  • Mean channel fluorescence was plotted against time and the data was fitted to either a one-phase or two phase association function using GraphPad Prism 6. The observed on-rate, k 0 bs was extrapolated from the curves and k on was calculated using
  • C57BI/6 mice were bred at Monash Animal Services (Monash University, Clayton, Australia). Mice were 6-8 weeks old and sex-matched for experiments. All experiments were approved by Monash Animal Research Platform ethics committee (MARP/2012/128).
  • C57BI/6 (C57), RFP, GFP and ⁇ 4 ⁇ ° ⁇ ⁇ °* vav-cre mice were bred at Monash Animal Services (Monash University, Clayton, Australia).
  • Red fluorescent protein (RFP) mice were provided by Professor Patrick Tarn (Children's Medical Research Institute, Sydney, Australia).
  • Conditional a4 flox/flox / a9 flox/flox m j ce were initially generated by cross breeding a4 flox flox mice (gift from Thalia Papayannopoulou, University of Washington, Department of Medicine/Hematology, Seattle, WA) with a 9 flox flox mice (kind gift from Dean Sheppard , Department of Medicine, University of California, SF) and vav-cre mice (kind gift from Warren Alexander, WEHI Institute, Melbourne).
  • NODSI L2RY _ " (NSG) mice were obtained in-house (Australian Regenerative Medicine Institute). Humanised NSG mice were generated by tail vein injection of freshly sorted cord blood CD34 + cells (>150k) with 2 ⁇ 10 6 irradiated mononuclear support cells.
  • mice were eyebled and assessed huCD45 and muCD45, and CD34 engraftment.
  • irradiation was performed in a split dose (5.25 Gy each) 6 hours apart, 24 hours before transplantation. A total of 2 ⁇ 10 5 irradiated (15 Gy) C57 BM cells were used as carrier cells for every recipient. All experiments were approved by Monash Animal Services ethics committee.
  • R-BC154 (25) in PBS (10 mg kg-1 ) was injected intravenously into C57 mice.
  • bone marrow cells were isolated as previously described in D. N. Haylock et al Stem Cells, 2007, 25, 1062-1069 and J. Grassinger, et al Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218- 225. Briefly, one femur, tibia and iliac crest were excised and cleaned of muscle. After removing the epi- and metaphyseal regions, bones were flushed with PBS-2% FBS to obtain whole bone marrow, which were washed with PBS-2% FBS and then immunolabelled for flow cytometry.
  • Bone fragments were digested with Collagenase I (3 mg/ml) and Dispase II (4 mg/ml) at 37 in an orbi tal shaker at 750 rpm. After 5 min, bone fragments were washed once with PBS and once with PBS 2%FBS to collect the endosteal bone marrow cells. Peripheral blood was collected by retro-orbital puncture and red blood cells were lysed using NH 4 CI lysis buffer for 5 min at room temperature. Isolated cell populations were washed with PBS 2%FBS and then stained for flow cytometry as described in Antibody Cocktails above.
  • MNC Mononuclear cells
  • mice received either intravenous or subcutaneous injections of R- BC154 (10 mg/kg) at 100 ul/10 gm mouse weight and analysed as described above.
  • a 4 Piand ⁇ 9 ⁇ LN18 cells (1 -2 10 5 cells) were treated with 50 nM of R-BC154 (80 ⁇ in PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI 2 /MgCI 2 ) at 37 ⁇ for 10 mins, washed with PBS, pelleted by centrifugation and then treated with BOP (80 ⁇ , PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI 2 /MgCI 2 ) at 0, 0.01 , 0.1 , 0.3, 1 , 10, 100 and 300 nM.
  • R-BC154 80 ⁇ in PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI 2 /MgCI 2
  • BOP 80 ⁇ , PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI 2 /MgCI 2
  • mice received subcutaneous injections at 100 ⁇ /10 gm body weight and PB was harvested by throat bleed using EDTA coated syringes.
  • G-CSF G-CSF. Mice received G-CSF at 250 ⁇ g/kg twice daily (500 ug/kg/day), 6-8 apart for 4 consecutive days. Groups receiving G-CSF and BOP received the standard G-CSF regime as described above followed by a single injection of BOP 1 h prior to harvest. Control mice received an equal volume of saline.
  • Humanised NSG mice were generated by tail vein injection of freshly sorted cord blood CD34 + cells (>150k) with 2 ⁇ 10 6 irradiated mononuclear support cells. After 4- 5 weeks post-transplantation, NSG mice were eyebled and assessed for huCD45 and muCD45. Under these conditions, >90% humanisation was achieved as determined by flow cytometric analysis based on %huCD45 relative to total %CD45. Humanised NSG mice were given at least 1 week to recover prior to experimentation. Mice were mobilized under the relevant conditions specified in "Mobilization protocols" and PB subsequently collected by throatbleed, lysed and immunolabelled as described in "Antibody cocktails”. (xv) Low- and high-proliferative potential colony-forming cell assays
  • LPP-CFC and HPP-CFC were assayed as previously described in J. Grassinger et al Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218-225 and Bartelmez, S. H. et al Experimental Hematology 17, 240-245 (1989). Briefly, mobilized PB were lysed and 4000 WBCs were plated in 35mm Petri dishes in a double-layer nutrient agar culture system containing recombinant mouse stem cell factor and recombinant human colony-stimulating factor-1 , interleukin-1 oc (IL-1 oc), and IL-3.
  • IL-1 oc interleukin-1 oc
  • PB from each donor mouse per treatment group were pooled, lysed and taken up at 1/3 of the original blood volume in PBS.
  • Irradiated WBM filler cells (2 ⁇ 10 5 /mouse) were added to aliquots of lysed PB at the specified transplant volume and then topped up with PBS to allow 200 ⁇ injection/mouse.
  • Irradiated C57BL/6 mice were administered by tail vein injection and multi-lineage RFP engraftment assessed at 6, 12 and 20 weeks post-transplant.
  • (b) Competitive primary and secondary transplant assay.
  • PB was then harvested and blood within RFP and GFP groups were pooled, lysed, washed and resuspended to 1/3 of the original blood volume in PBS.
  • Equal volumes of RFP and GFP blood were mixed to allow transplantation of 500 ⁇ of RFP and GFP blood per mouse.
  • Irradiated WBM filler cells (2 ⁇ 10 5 /mouse) were added and the mixture topped up in PBS to allow 200 ⁇ injection/mouse.
  • the agents of the various embodiments may be prepared using the reaction routes and synthesis schemes as described below.
  • the preparation of particular compounds of the embodiments is described in detail in the following examples, but the artisan will recognize that the chemical reactions described may be readily adapted to prepare a number of other agents of the various embodiments.
  • the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds may be successfully performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g. by appropriately protecting interfering groups, by changing to other suitable reagents known in the art, or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions.
  • a list of suitable protecting groups in organic synthesis can be found in T.W. Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1991 .
  • Reagents useful for synthesizing compounds may be obtained or prepared according to techniques known in the art.
  • CDCI 3 deuterated chloroform
  • CuAAC copper(l)-catalyzed azide alkyne cycloaddition
  • DIAD diisopropyl azodicarboxylate
  • DIPEA diisopropyl ethyl amine
  • HATU O-(7-aza-1 H-benzotriazol-1 -yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexa- fluorophosphate
  • Petroleum spirits refers to the fraction boiling at 40-60 °C.
  • Thin layer chromatography TLC was performed on Merck pre-coated 0.25 mm silica aluminium-backed plates and visualised with UV light and/or dipping in ninhydrin solution or phosphomolybdic acid solution followed by heating. Purification of reaction products was carried out by flash chromatography using Merck Silica Gel 60 (230-400 mesh) or reverse phase C18 silica gel. Melting points were recorded on a Reichert-Jung Thermovar hot-stage microscope melting point apparatus. Optical rotations were recorded on a Perkin Elmer Model 341 polarimeter.
  • FTIR spectra were obtained using a ThermoNicolet 6700 spectrometer using a SmartATR (attenuated total reflectance) attachment fitted with a diamond window.
  • Proton ( 1 H) and carbon ( 13 C) NMR spectra were recorded on a BrukerAV400 spectrometer at 400 and 100 MHz, respectively.
  • 1 H NMR are reported in ppm using a solvent as an internal standard (CDCIs at 7.26 ppm).
  • Proton-decoupled 13 C NMR 100 MHz are reported in ppm using a solvent as an internal standard (CDCI 3 at 77.16 ppm).
  • High resolution mass spectrometry was acquired on either a WATERS QTOF II (CMSE, Clayton, VIC 3168) or a Finnigan hybrid LTQ-FT mass spectrometer (Thermo Electron Corp., Bio21 Institute, University of Melbourne, Parkville, VIC 3010) employing Electrospray lonisation (ESI).
  • CMSE Clayton, VIC 3168
  • a Finnigan hybrid LTQ-FT mass spectrometer Thermo Electron Corp., Bio21 Institute, University of Melbourne, Parkville, VIC 3010 employing Electrospray lonisation (ESI).
  • Step 2 N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (28)
  • Step 3 L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (29)
  • Step 4 N-(Benzenesulfonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (30)
  • BOP was converted to the sodium salt by treatment of a solution of the free acid of BOP in MeOH with 0.98 equivalents of NaOH (0.01 M NaOH). The solution was filtered through a 0.45 ⁇ syringe filter unit and the product lyophilised to give the sodium salt as a fluffy colourless powder.
  • the general strategy for the fluorescent labelling of BOP was based on an efficient strategy for installing a frans-configured bifunctional PEG linker at the C4-position of BOP for subsequent conjugation to a fluorescent tag.
  • Lactone 4 has previously been reported as a versatile synthon for accessing 4-c/s- hydroxy proline based dipetides through direct acylation with protected amino acids. Subsequent activation of the 4-c/s-hydroxy group followed by SN2 displacement with nucleophiles would then provide the desired 4-frans-configured proline derivatives.
  • C4-functionalised derivatives of BOP could be acquired starting from lactone 4 and tyrosine derivative 7 (Scheme 2).
  • Lactone 4 was readily prepared by treatment of A/-phenylsulfonyl-frans-4-hydroxy-L-proline under Mitsunobu conditions employing DIAD and PP i3.
  • the tyrosine derivative 7 was synthesised from protected 5 by treatment with pyrrolidine carbonyl chloride in the presence of K2CO3 to give intermediate 6, followed by removal of the Cbz protecting group.
  • Exposure of lactone 4 to tyrosine derivative 7 under biphasic conditions afforded the dipeptide 8 in 89% yield as a single diastereoisomer. This method takes advantage of the activated nature of the bicyclic lactone and allows clean conversion to the 4-c/s-hydroxy proline dipeptides without resorting to dehydrative peptide coupling.
  • the alkyne functionalised PEG derivative 15 was obtained in one step from 10 by condensation with propionic acid under DCC coupling conditions (Scheme 2a).
  • the synthesis of frans-azido functionalised dipeptide 18 was readily achieved from lactone 4 (Scheme 2b).
  • Treatment of 4 with Na 2 C0 3 in MeOH afforded the c/s-hydroxy proline ester 12 in 80% yield.
  • the c/s-alcohol of 12 was converted to the corresponding mesylate, which was subsequently displaced with sodium azide to give the trans- azido proline ester 16 in 88% yield over 2 steps.
  • dipeptide 18 is also accessible from the c/s-alcohol 8 (from Scheme 1 ). Conveniently, mesylation and subsequent azide displacement of alcohol 8 proceeded smoothly to furnish product 18, which was obtained without the necessity for chromatographic purification.
  • Step 1 (1S,4S)-5-(Phenylsulfonyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2. 1]heptan-3-one (4)
  • Step 3 (S)-4-(2-Amino-3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (7)
  • a mixture of protected tyrosine 6 (950 mg, 1 .13 mmol) and Pd/C (10%, 50 mg) in MeOH (40 mL) was purged three times with H 2 .
  • the mixture was stirred under a H 2 atmosphere for 2 h at which point TLC indicated complete consumption of starting material.
  • the mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude amine 7 (637 mg, 98%) as a colourless oil, which set solid upon standing.
  • Step 4 4-((S)-2-((2S S)-4-Hydroxy-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxam methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (8)
  • the lactone 4 (466 mg, 1 .84 mmol) and the amine 7 (510 mg, 1 .76 mmol) in toluene/H 2 0 (5:1 , 6 ml_) was stirred at 80 ⁇ for 2 d and then diluted with EtOAc and washed with 1 M HCI, sat. aq. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS0 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 5 4-((R)-3-Methoxy-3-oxo-2-((2S,4R)-4-((3-oxo-1-phenyl-2,8, 11, 14-tetraoxa-4- azaheptadecan- 17-yl)amino)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)propyl) phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (11)
  • Alcohol 8 (105 mg, 0.19 mmol) was dissolved in dry CH 2 CI 2 (2 ml_) under N 2 at -20 ⁇ . DIPEA (99 ⁇ _, 0.57 mmol) was added followed by Tf 2 O (50 ⁇ _, 0.57 mmol) dropwise over 30 min. The reaction was stirred for 2 h at -20 ⁇ and then quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO 3 , diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase separated. The organic phase was washed with H 2 O, 2% citric acid, sat. aq. NaHCO 3 and brine.
  • Step 6 Methyl (2S,4S)-4-hydroxy-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (12) A mixture of lactone 4 (1 .74 g, 6.88 mmol) and Na 2 C03 (3.65 g, 34.4 mmol) was stirred in MeOH (50 ml_) at rt overnight. The residue was concentrated, taken up in EtOAc (100 ml_), and H 2 0 and the organic phase separated.
  • the methyl ester 16 (586 mg, 1 .89 mmol) in 3:1 EtOH/THF (40 mL) was treated with 0.2 M NaOH (12.3 mL, 2.45 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 3 h at rt and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was diluted with diethyl ether and the aqueous phase separated. The organic layer was extracted with 0.2 M NaOH (2 x 10 mL) and the combined aqueous extract was acidified with 10% HCI. The aqueous layer was extracted with CHCI3 (4 ⁇ 30 mL) and the combined organic phases washed with brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 9 4-((S)-2-((2S R)-4-azido-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbox methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (18)
  • HBTU 0-(Benzotriazol-1 -yl)-/V,/V,/ ⁇ /',/ ⁇ /'-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate
  • Methanesulfonyl chloride (92 ⁇ _, 1 .18 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of the alcohol 8 (251 mg, 0.394 mmol) and triethylamine (170 ⁇ _, 1 .22 mmol) in dry CH 2 CI 2 at 0 ⁇ under N 2 .
  • the reaction was stirred for 1 h at 0 and then warmed to rt and stirred for a further 1 h.
  • the reaction was diluted with CH 2 CI 2 and washed sequentially with 5% HCI, sat. aq. NaHC0 3 and brine.
  • Step 10 4-((R)-3-methoxy-3-oxo-2-((2S,4R)-4-(4-((3-oxo-1-phenyl-2,8, 11, 14-tetraoxa- 4-azaheptadecan-1 '-yl) carbamoyl) -1H- 1, 2, 3-triazol-1-yl)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)
  • Step 11 (R)-2-((2SAR)-4-(4-((3-(2-(2-(3-aminopropoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)propyl) carbamoyl) -1H- 1, 2, 3-triazol-1-yl)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)-3-(4- ((pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)oxy)phenyl)propanoic acid (21)
  • Aqueous NaOH (1 .13 mL, 0.225 mmol, 0.2 M) was added to a stirred mixture of methyl ester 19 (1 10 mg, 0.1 13 mmol) in EtOH/THF (2:1 , 3 mL) and stirred overnight at rt.
  • the reaction was quenched with 1 M HCI, diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase separated.
  • the aqueous phase was extracted twice with CHCI 3 and the combined organic phases dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude acid 20 (100 mg).
  • the methyl ester 18 (420 mg, 0.737 mmol) in EtOH (10 ml_) was treated with 0.2 M NaOH (4.05 ml_, 0.81 1 mmol) and stirred at rt for 1 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to remove EtOH and the aqueous phase acidified with 10% HCI. The aqueous phase was extracted with CHCI3 (4 x 10 ml_) and the combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the azide 23 (12 mg, 22 ⁇ ) and /V-propynyl sulforhodamine B 24 (14 mg, 24 ⁇ ) in DMF (2 ml_) were treated with CuS0 4 (86 ⁇ _, 0.86 ⁇ , 0.01 M in H 2 0), sodium ascorbate (430 ⁇ _, 4.3 ⁇ , 0.01 M in H 2 0) and tris[ ⁇ 1 -benzyl- 1 H- 1 ,2, 3-triazol-4- yl)methyl]amine (TBTA) (108 ⁇ _, 1.08 ⁇ , 0.01 M in DMF).
  • the mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 2 h at which point TLC indicated formation of a new fluorescent product.
  • LSK cells progenitor cells
  • whole bone marrow was harvested from untreated and treated (R-BC154; 10 mg kg-1 ) mice (3 mice per group).
  • Lineage positive cells were immunolabelled using a lineage cocktail (B220, Gr-1 , Mac-1 and Ter-1 19) and then removed by immunomagnetic selection with sheep anti-rat conjugated Dynabeads (Invitrogen) according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • the resultant lineage depleted cells were stained with anti-Sca-1 -PB and anti-c-kit-FITC.
  • Immunolabelled cells were sorted on Sca-1 +c-kit+ using a Cytopeia Influx (BD Biosciences) cell sorter and imaged using an Olympus BX51 microscope.
  • the integrin dependent cell binding properties were assessed using ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ over-expressing human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines that were generated.
  • stable LN18 cells over-expressing integrin ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ were generated via retroviral transduction of human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines.
  • Silencing of background a 4 expression in parental and ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ transduced LN18 cells was achieved by retroviral vector delivery of a 4 shRNA (J Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59). (See Figures 1 and 2).
  • R-BC154 was associated with only a 1 .9-fold and 1 .5-fold reduction in binding affinity to ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins, respectively.
  • Mn 2+ acts to stabilise the ligand bound conformation and is consistent with previous reports using radiolabeled substrates.
  • Mn 2+ activation is associated with slower on- and off-rates for ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin binding. Consequently, competitive inhibition assays using R-BC154 for in vitro screening of small molecule integrin inhibitors under Ca 2+ /Mg 2+ conditions is preferred as the exceedingly slow off rates under Mn 2+ activation would require much longer incubation time.
  • k 0 b S The observed association rate (k 0 b S ) represents the fast phase of binding and accounts for >60% and >80% of R- BC154 binding to ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ ⁇ integrins, respectively.
  • Data from the dissociation experiment represented in Figure 5c was fitted to a one-phase exponential decay function (unless otherwise stated) and dissociation rate constants (k 0 ff) extrapolated from the curve.
  • c Dissociation data for R-BC154 binding to ⁇ ⁇ LN18 cells in the presence of Ca 2+ /Mg 2+ was fitted to a two-phase dissociation curve and k 0 ff was determined from the fast-phase of the curve, which accounted for >60% of the dissociation.
  • Example 3 In vivo binding of Compound 25 (R-BC154) to bone marrow HSC and progenitor cells
  • R-BC154 is a high affinity ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonist, whose binding activity is highly dependent on integrin activation.
  • This example tests whether R-BC154 could be used in in vivo binding experiments to investigate ⁇ 9 ⁇ ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin activity on defined populations of HSC.
  • assessing integrin activity on HSC has relied primarily on in vitro or ex vivo staining of bone marrow cells or purified HSC using fluorescent labelled antibodies.
  • R-BC154 (10 mg kg -1 ) was injected intravenously into mice and analysed for R-BC154 labelling of phenotypically defined bone marrow progenitor cells (LSK cell; lineage-Sca-1 +c-Kit+) and HSC (LSKSLAM cell; LSKCD48-CD150+) using multi-colour flow cytometry ( Figure 6a and b).
  • Example 4 - R-BC154 binds preferentially to mice and human haematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro
  • R-BC154 ( Figure 7a) binds human glioblastoma LN18 cells overexpressing human ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins ( Figure. 7b) only in the presence of divalent metal cations such as Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ or Mn 2+ , which act to induce conformational changes required for high affinity integrin binding in vitro.
  • divalent metal cations such as Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ or Mn 2+ , which act to induce conformational changes required for high affinity integrin binding in vitro.
  • R-BC154 Divalent cation and dose dependent binding of R-BC154 was also confirmed on human cord blood mononuclear cells (MNC) ( Figure 7i). Under activating conditions, greater binding was observed on stem cell enriched CD34 + CD38 " cells compared to lineage-committed CD34 " cells, albeit to a lesser extent relative to CD34 + CD38 + progenitor cells ( Figure 7j and 7k). These results show R-BC154 binding to murine and human haematopoietic cells is divalent metal cation dependent and is also biased towards haematopoietic progenitor cells relative to HSC under exogenous activation in vitro.
  • Example 5 - R-BC154 targets HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated 04/0(9 integrins within the endosteal niche in situ.
  • Example 6 Small molecule ⁇ 9 ⁇ / ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin antagonists rapidly mobilise HSC and progenitor cells
  • BOP non-fluorescently labelled BOP (2)
  • Figure 1 1 a BOP was shown to be a potent inhibitor of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins based on competitive inhibition assays using R- BC154 and overexpressing LN18 cell lines ( Figure 1 1 b) and can inhibit integrin dependent adhesion to VCAM-1 and thrombin-cleaved Opn. Additionally, BOP effectively inhibited ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ and ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrin binding on HSC and progenitors, demonstrated by competitive displacement of R-BC154 binding to LSK and LSKSLAM under activating conditions ( Figure 1 1 c).
  • the enhanced activation of integrins by the endosteum was not specific to primitive HSC and progenitors and is unlikely to be restricted to just ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins.
  • one possible explanation for the enhanced integrin activation observed within endosteal BM is its close proximity to bone. Bone, being distinguishable from other microenvironment cells based on its high mineral content, is the primary storage site of inorganic salts of calcium and magnesium as well as trace metals such as manganese, all of which are known to induce ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ and ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ integrins to adopt higher affinity ligand-binding conformations.

Abstract

Haematopoietic stem cell mobilization is a process whereby haematopoietic stem cells are stimulated out of the bone marrow space. Before HSC can mobilize, they must be dislodged and released from the BM stem cell niche in which they reside and are retained by adhesive interactions. Accordingly, in an aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an α 9 integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche. Once mobilized to the peripheral blood (PB) the HSC may be collected for transplant. Methods which enhance mobilization of the HSC can also improve treatments of haematological disorders.

Description

DISLODGEMENT AND RELEASE OF HSC FROM THE BONE MARROW STEM CELL NICHE USING ALPHA9 INTEGRIN ANTAGONISTS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to enhancing dislodgement and release of haematopoietic stem cells (HSC) and precursors and progenitors thereof from a bone marrow (BM) stem cell niche and methods for enhancing the dislodgement and release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from the BM and the stem cell niche. The invention also relates to compositions for use in enhancing the dislodgement and release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof. Cell populations of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof which have been dislodged and released by the methods and compositions are included as well as the use of the cell populations for treatment of a haematological disorder and transplantation of the HSC, precursors and progenitors thereof.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
HSC regulation and retention within the BM stem cell niche is mediated through interactions between HSC surface receptors and their respective ligands expressed by surrounding cells such as osteoblasts and sinusoidal endothelial cells. Spatial distribution analysis of HSC within BM using functional assays and in vivo and ex vivo imaging indicate they preferentially localize nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche. Of note, HSC identical to the classic Lin-Sca- 1 +ckit+CD150+CD48- phenotype, but isolated from endosteal BM have greater homing potential and enhanced long-term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity. Thus, the therapeutic targeting of endosteal HSC for mobilization should provide better transplant outcomes.
The localization of haematopoiesis to the BM involves developmental^ regulated adhesive interactions between primitive haematopoietic cells and the stromal-cell- mediated haematopoietic microenvironment of the BM stem cell niche. Under steady- state conditions, HSC are retained in the BM niche by adhesive interactions with stromal elements (such as VCAM-1 and osteopontin (Opn)) leading to the physiologic retention of primitive haematopoietic progenitor cells in the BM. A perturbation of the adhesive interactions can lead to the release of the HSC retained in the BM and evoke the release of stem/progenitor cells from the bone marrow niche and eventually into the circulation by mobilization. The physiologic egress or mobilization of leukocytes from bone marrow ultimately to peripheral blood, as well as the escape of a small number of stem/progenitor cells from the normal bone marrow environment to the circulation, is a poorly understood phenomena. The movement of cells from the extravascular spaces of bone marrow to circulation may require a coordinated sequence of reversible adhesion and migration steps. The repertoire of adhesion molecules expressed by stem/progenitor cells or by stromal cells in bone marrow is crucial in this process. Alterations in the adhesion and/or migration of progenitor cells triggered by diverse stimuli would likely result in their dislodgment or redistribution between bone marrow and peripheral blood.
Releasing and mobilising specific populations of HSC may allow uses in various situations including transplantation, gene therapy, treatment of disease including cancers such as leukaemias, neoplastic cancers including breast cancers, or repair of tissues and skin. However, to mobilize HSC requires rapid and selective mobilization regimes which can initially dislodge the HSC from the BM. Dislodgement and release of specific cell populations of HSC from the BM stem cell niche can provide greater long-term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution.
The transplantation of mobilized peripheral blood (PB) haematopoietic stem cells (HSC) into patients undergoing treatment for blood diseases has essentially replaced traditional bone marrow (BM) transplants. Some clinical practices for HSC mobilization are achieved with a 5-day course of recombinant granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF), which is believed to stimulate the production of proteases that cleave CXCR4/SDF-1 interactions. However, G-CSF is ineffective in a large cohort of patients and is associated with several side effects such as bone pain, spleen enlargement and on rare occasions, splenic rupture, myocardial infarction and cerebral ischemia.
These inherent disadvantages of G-CSF have driven efforts to identify alternate mobilization strategies based on small molecules. For example, the FDA-approved CXCR4 antagonist AMD3100 (Plerixafor; MozobilTM) has been shown to rapidly mobilize HSC with limited toxicity issues. Nevertheless, clinical mobilization with AMD3100 is only effective in combination with G-CSF and the search for rapid, selective and G-CSF independent mobilization regimens remains a topic of clinical interest. Although clinically G-CSF is the most extensively used mobilization agent, its drawbacks further include potentially toxic side effects, a relatively long course of treatment (5-7 days of consecutive injections), and variable responsiveness of patients.
However, to effect mobilization, the HSC must be released from their attachment to the BM stem cell niche. The molecules that are important in niche function and retaining the HSC in the niche environment include VCAM-1 , Osteopontin (Opn) and Tenasin-C.
Integrins such as α4βι have been implicated in the mobilization of HSC. Specifically both α4βι (VLA-4) and ctgPi integrins expressed by HSC have been implicated in stem cell quiescence and niche retention through binding to VCAM-1 and osteopontin (Opn) within the endosteal region. While the role of <¾βι integrin in HSC mobilization is unknown, the down-regulation of Opn using non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID) as well as selective inhibition of integrin a4 or G-CSF has validated Opn/VCAM-1 binding to integrins as effective targets for HSC mobilization. However, various characteristics such as binding to small molecules such as integrins show that they are distinctly different molecules.
In Pepinsky et al (2002) the difference between α4βι and <¾βι integrins is evident in their binding characteristics. Pepinsky shows that the differences in binding to small molecule N-benzene-sulfonyl)-(L)-prolyl-(L)-0-(1 -pyrrolidinyl carbonyl) tyrosine (BOP) is evident with EGTA treatment. The treatment inhibited binding of the monoclonal antibody 9EG7 to α4βι, whereas it stimulated the binding of 9EG7 to α9βι. Most notable was the estimated >1000 fold difference in the affinity of the integrins for VCAM-1 which binds α4βι with an apparent Kd of 10nM and <¾βι with an apparent Kd of >10μΜ. Differences were also seen in the binding of <¾βι and α4βι to osteopontin.
Accordingly, it is an aim of the present invention to identify rapid and selective HSC dislodging and releasing compounds and regimes that are independent of G-CSF to enhance dislodgement and release of HSC which leads to improved mobilization of HSC. By targeting these compounds to specific HSC populations reconstitution and transplantation outcomes may be improved. The discussion of documents, acts, materials, devices, articles and the like is included in this specification solely for the purpose of providing a context for the present invention. It is not suggested or represented that any or all of these matters formed part of the prior art base or were common general knowledge in the field relevant to the present invention as it existed before the priority date of each claim of this application.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In an aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche in the presence or absence of G-CSF.
Preferably, the dislodgement of the HSC leads to release of the HSC from the BM stem cell binding ligand which enables the HSC to mobilize from the BM to the PB and thereby enhances mobilization of the HSC. Further stimulation of mobilization can be assisted by the use of mobilization agents that further enhance mobilization of HSC to the PB. Preferably, the HSC are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group including CD34+cells, CD38+ cells, CD90+ cells, CD133+ cells, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage- committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells.
Preferably the antagonist of an <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof, is an an <¾βι integrin or an active portion thereof.
In another embodiment, the method further includes administering an antagonist of a4 integrin or an active portion thereof. Preferably the a4 integrin is an antagonist of α4βι or an active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the antagonist cross-reacts with ag and a4, and optionally cross-reacts with <¾βι and α4βι . Optionally, the antagonist is a agPi/a4Piantagonist or an active portion thereof.
Preferably, the antagonist is a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and Ci-C4 alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H; R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R11 ;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C4 alkyl), -C(O)-(C C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl; R10 and R1 1, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
Preferably, the compound of Formula (I) is:
Figure imgf000007_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
More preferably, the compound of Formula (I) is
Figure imgf000007_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Most preferably, the compound of Formula (I) is
Figure imgf000008_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In another embodiment there is provided a composition for enhancing dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand said composition comprising an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described.
In yet another aspect of the invention, there is provided a method of harvesting HSC from a subject said method comprising:
administering in the presence or absence of G-CSF an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof to a subject wherein said effective amount enhances dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche;
mobilizing the dislodged HSC to PB; andharvesting the HSC from the PB.
In an even further aspects of the invention methods are provided for the treatment of a haematological disorder in a subject said method comprising administering to the subject in the presence or absence of G-CSF, a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described or a cell composition comprising HSC harvested from a subject administered with the antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as herein described to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
In yet another preferred embodiment, the haematological disorder is a haematopoietic neoplastic disorder and the method involves chemosensitizing the HSC to alter susceptibility of the HSC, such that a chemotherapeutic agent, having become ineffective, becomes more effective. In yet another aspect there is provided a method of transplanting HSC into a patient, said method comprising
administering an ctg integrin antagonist to a subject to dislodge HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand;
releasing and mobilizing the HSC from the BM to the PB;
harvesting HSC from the PB from the subject; and
transplanting the HSC to the patient.
Other aspects of the present invention will become apparent to those ordinarily skilled in the art upon review of the following description of specific embodiments of the invention.
FIGURES
For a further understanding of the aspects and advantages of the present invention, reference should be made to the following detailed description, taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
Figure 1 shows the generation of LN18-derived cell lines. Stable LN18 cells over- expressing human integrin a4Piand <¾βι were generated via retroviral transduction of human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines. Silencing of background a4 expression in parental and <¾βι transduced LN18 cells was achieved by retroviral vector delivery of a4 shRNA.
Figure 2 shows antibody staining of α4βι and <¾βι LN18 cells. Control LN18 SiA4, LN18 α4βι, and LN18 <¾βι cells were stained with mouse isotype control, mouse-anti- human a4 antibody or mouse-anti-human <¾βι antibody and then secondary labelled with Alexa Fluor 594 conjugated goat-anti-mouse lgG1 . Cells counterstained with DAPI (blue). Figure 3 shows saturation binding experiment of compound 22 and R-BC154 to control (no integrins; cross-dotted line), α4βι (circle-dashed line) and <¾βι (square- solid line) LN18 cells with (a) compound 22 in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (open symbol) and (b) R-BC154 in the presence of either 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (open symbol) or 1 mM Mn2+ (closed symbol). Data shown are expressed as mean fluorescence intensity (MFI) ± SEM (n = 3). (c) Fluorescence microscopy images of over- expressing and control LN18 cells stained with 50 nM R-BC154 (red) under Ca2+/Mg2+ and Mn2+ conditions. Cells were counterstained with DAPI (blue). Figure 4 shows cation dependent binding of R-BC154. LN18 <¾βι cells were treated with R-BC154 at the given concentrations in TBS buffer only (black bars), 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (red bars) or 1 mM Mn2+ (blue bars). Data obtained is from a single experiment and is expressed as %max fluorescence. Figure 5 shows kinetics measurements of R-BC154 binding to LN18 cells. Association rates for binding of R-BC154 to (a) ¾βι (circle-dashed line) and (b) α9β! (square-solid line) integrins were determined in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (open symbol) and 1 mM Mn2+ (closed symbol) in TBS buffer by treatment of cells with 50 nM R-BC154 for 0, 0.5, 1 , 2, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 minutes at 37 . (c) Dissociation rate measurements for binding of R-BC154 to (circle-dashed line) and α9β! (square- solid line) integrins were determined in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (open symbol) and 1 mM Mn2+ (closed symbol) in TBS buffer at 0, 2.5, 5, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. Data shown are expressed as % mean of maximum fluorescence ±SEM (n = 3) and plotted as a function of time. On-rate data were fitted to a two-phase association function for all curves (R2 > 0.997). Off-rate data were fitted to a one- phase exponential decay function for all curves except α4βι (Ca2+/Mg2+), which was fitted to a two-phase exponential decay function (R2 > 0.999). .
Figure 6 shows flow cytometric histogram plots of (a) bone marrow haematopoietic progenitor cells (LSK) and (b) HSC (LSKSLAM) isolated from untreated (grey lines) and R-BC154 (10 mg kg-1 ) injected (red lines) C57BI/6 mice. Data is representative of 3 biological samples. Fluorescent microscopy images (inset) of FACS sorted progenitor cells (Lineage-Sea- 1 +c-Kit+) isolated from (c) untreated and (d) R-BC154 injected mice. Sca-1 + (blue), c-Kit+ (green), R-BC154+ (red).
Figure 7 shows R-BC154 preferentially binds murine and human haematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro, (a) Chemical structure of R-BC154 (1). (b) Representative flow cytometry histogram plot of R-BC154 binding to control S1A4 (a4 knockdown; black), α4βι (red) and α9βι (blue) transduced LN18 cell lines in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+. (c) Schematic of a femur depicting endosteal (red) and central (blue) BM and a representative flow cytometry plot of BM Lin"Sca+c-kit+ (LSK) and LSKCD150+CD48" (LSKSLAM). (d) Histogram plot of LSK and LSKSLAM cells stained with R-BC154 (10 nM) in the presence of 10 mM EDTA (deactivating; black) and 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (activating; green). Unstained LSK and LSKSLAM cells are depicted in grey, (e) R-BC154 binding to LSK and LSKSLAM cells harvested from central and endosteal BM stained in the presence of 10 mM EDTA (deactivating; black) and 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (activating; green). Unstained cells are depicted in grey. Data is expressed as %max mean fluorescence intensity (MFI) ± SEM (n = 3) and is representative of at least 3 separate experiments, (f) R-BC154 binding to central (blue) and endosteal (red) LSK cells in the absence of cations. Dotted shaded curves represent unstained LSK cells, (g) Comparative R-BC154 binding to lymphoid (B220+ and CD3+) and myeloid (Gr1 Mac1 +), LSK and LSKSLAM cells from central (blue bar) and endosteal (red bar) BM in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ binding. Data is representative of 2 separate experiments. One-way ANOVA p<0.0001 (h) R-BC154 binding to central and endosteal LSK and LSKSLAM cells from wt (black bar) and tX4- t 9- ~ conditional KO mice (white bar), (i) Dose response binding of R-BC154 to human mononuclear cells (MNC) in the presence of 1 mM Ca27Mg2+ (green; activated) and in the absence of cations (black; non-activated), (j) Representative flow cytometry plot of human MNC expressing CD34+ and CD38". Gated populations represent lineage committed cells (P1 = CD34"), haematopoietic progenitor cells (P2 = CD34+CD38+) and enriched stem and progenitor cells (P3 = CD34+CD38"). (k) R- BC154 binding to CD34", CD34+CD38" and CD34+CD38" cells in the presence of 1 mM Ca27Mg2+ (green; activating) and absence of cations (black; non-activating). Unstained cells depicted in grey. Data is from 3 individual cord blood donors and is expressed as normalized MFI (mean ± SEM). *p<0.05, **p<0.01 , ***p<0.005 and ****p<0.001 .
Figure 8 shows histogram plots of gated lymphoid (B220+ and CD3+), myeloid (Gr1 Mac1 +) and lineage" populations from WBM treated with R-BC154 (10 nM) in the presence of 10 mM EDTA and 1 mM Ca27Mg2+. Unstained cells depicted in grey. Data is mean ± SEM (n = 3). Figure 9 shows R-BC154 targets HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated
Figure imgf000012_0001
integrins within the endosteal niche in situ, (a) Representative histogram plot of R- BC154 binding on gated LSK cells from central (blue) and endosteal (red) BM harvested from mice injected with R-BC154. R-BC154hl population is depicted. LSK cells from uninjected mice shown in black, (b) in vivo time-course experiment depicting the proportion of R-BC154hi cells within LSK and LSKSLAM cells isolated from endosteal (red) and central (blue) BM (n = 3 per time point), p-value (2-way ANOVA) represents comparison between central and endosteal at the given time point. Data is mean ± SEM. (c) %R-BC154hi cells within lymphoid (B220+ and CD3+) and myeloid (Gr1+ and Mac1 +) progenies isolated from endosteal (red bar) and central (blue bar) BM 5 mins after R-BC154 injection (n = 3). Data is mean ± SEM and is representative of 2 independent experiments, (d) in vivo R-BC154 binding is dependent on <¾ and ctg integrin expression on LSK cells. Fluorescence microscopy images of lineage-depleted FACS sorted Sca-1 +c-kit+ cells from R-BC154 injected wt and
Figure imgf000012_0002
conditional KO mice (left). R-BC154 (red); Sca-1 -PB (blue); c-kit (green). Flow cytometric histogram plots of gated LSK cells from wt (red) and tX4- tX9- ~ conditional KO mice (grey) injected with R-BC154 (right). LSK cells from uninjected mice shown in black. Data is representative of 2 separate experiments, (e) Time course R-BC154 binding to LSK cells in PB and BM following subcutaneous administration. Data is mean ± SEM (n = 3). *p<0.05, **p<0.01 , ***p<0.005 and ****p<0.001 .
Figure 10 shows (a) Analysis of the WBC content, (b) LSK content and (c) LSKSLAM content in peripheral blood of mice treated with R-BC154 at 15 and 30 mins post- injection. Data is mean ± SEM and is not-significant (One-way ANOVA).
Figure 1 1 shows Small molecule ο^β-ι/ο^βι integrin antagonist BOP rapidly mobilizes HSC and progenitors, (a) Chemical structure of ο¾β-ι/θ4βι integrin antagonist BOP (2). (b) Competitive inhibition of R-BC154 binding to ο¾βι (dotted line) and ο¾βι (solid line) LN18 cells with BOP in the presence of 1 mM Ca27Mg2+. Calculated IC5o values are depicted inset, (c) Competitive displacement of R-BC154 binding to endosteal LSK and LSKSLAM cells using BOP in the presence of 1 mM Ca27Mg2+. Data is mean ± SEM (n = 3) (d) Analysis of the WBC, (e) LSK and (f) LSKSLAM content in the peripheral blood of mice treated with BOP (10 mg/kg) over 90 mins. Data is mean ± SEM (n = 5 per time point).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Haematopoietic stem cell mobilization is a process whereby haematopoietic stem cells are stimulated out of the bone marrow space (e.g., the hip bones and the chest bone) into the bloodstream, so they are available for collection for future reinfusion or they naturally egress from the bone marrow to move throughout the body to lodge in organs such as the spleen to provide blood cells. This interesting natural phenomenon, that often accompanies various haematological disorders, may be adapted as a useful component of therapy, given the discovery of agents that can artificially incite mobilization of HSCs into the bloodstream where they can be collected and used for purposes such as transplantation. Compounds such as G- CSF and the FDA-approved CXCR-4 antagonist AMD 3100 have been shown to mobilize HSC. However, toxicity issues and various side effects can result from this treatment.
Before HSC can mobilize, they must be dislodged and released from the BM stem cell niche in which they reside and are retained by adhesive interactions.
Accordingly, in an aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
In steady state conditions, HSC reside in the BM in specialized locations called the BM stem cell niche. Here they reside as quiescent stem cells before they are released ready to enter the PB and lodge in tissues to start differentiating. The HSC are retained in the BM stem cell niche by adhesion molecules or binding ligands such as but not limited to VCAM-1 , Opn and Tenacin-C. Management of the HSC/BM stem cell niche interaction is instrumental the dislodgement and release of HSC to the BM stem cell niche and eventually to the PB. Hence the present invention provides a means to dislodge and release the HSC from the interactions in the BM stem cell niche by disrupting the adhesive interactions and binding ligands between the HSC and the BM stem cell niche environment. The cells then become available for mobilizing to the PB or they may remain in the BM.
The BM stem cell niche includes the endosteal niche and the central medullary cavity. The endosteal stem cell niche is located at the endosteum of the bone marrow, where osteoblasts are the main regulators of HSC functions such as proliferation and quiescence. Furthermore, a significant proportion of HSC are closely associated with sinusoidal endothelial cells in the endothelial niche where they are ready to enter peripheral blood and start differentiation. The central medullary cavity is the central cavity of the bone responsible for the formation of red blood cells and white blood cells otherwise known as the bone marrow. Applicants have found that by inhibiting at least the ctg integrin with small molecule antagonists, HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof can dislodge from the BM stem cell niche preferably into the endosteal niche or mobilize into the PB with long term multi-lineage engraftment potential. Surprisingly it has been found that the use of an antagonist to ctg integrin or an active portion thereof significantly increases the dislodgement and release of at least CD34+ stem cells and progenitors into the blood.
Applicants have developed a fluorescent small molecule integrin antagonist, R-BC154 (1 ) (Figure 1 a), based on a series of /V-phenylsulfonylproline dipeptides, which bind activated human and murine ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins as well as BM HSC and progenitors (Figure 1 a). Applicants postulated that this family of compounds would target potent endosteal HSC for mobilization based on the restricted interaction between ο^β-ι/ο^βι and Opn within endosteal BM. It has now been found that R- BC154 (1 ) and its non-labelled derivative BOP (2) preferentially bind and mobilize mouse and human HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated ο¾β-ι/θ4βι integrins in vivo. Thus, therapeutic targeting of endosteal HSC using ο¾βι ο¾βι integrin inhibitors offers a promising alternative to current mobilization strategies for stem cell transplant applications. Integrins are non-covalently linked αβ heterodimeric trans-membrane proteins that function primarily as mediators of cell adhesion and cell signalling processes. In mammals, 18 a-chains and 8 β-chains have been identified, with at least 24 different and unique αβ combinations described to date.
The α4βι integrin (very late antigen-4; VLA-4) is expressed primarily on leukocytes and are known to be receptors for vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM-1 ), fibronectin and osteopontin (Opn). The α4βι integrin is a key regulator of leukocyte recruitment, migration and activation and has important roles in inflammation and autoimmune disease. Accordingly, significant effort has been focused on the development of small molecule inhibitors of α4βι integrin function for the treatment of asthma, multiple sclerosis and Crohn's disease, with several candidates progressing to phase I and II clinical trials. Whilst the related βι integrin, α9βι , shares many of the structural and functional properties as α4βι and also binds to several of the same ligands including VCAM-1 and Opn there are differences between the integrins α4βι and α9βι which make them distinct. Unlike α4βι which has a restricted expression that is largely on leukocytes, the cellular expression of α9βι is widespread.
For instance binding of small molecules to α9βι and α4βι integrins have been shown to be different. As shown in the Examples herein, the greatest difference is in the off- rate kinetics. An α9βι antagonist (R-BC154) as well as BOP are shown to have significantly reduced off-rates for α9βι compared to α4βι . The details for R-BC154 is exemplified in Example 2 herein (Figure 5c) and details for BOP are exemplified in Pepinsky et al (2002) (Figure 4b).
Previously, both α4βι and α9βι integrins have been shown to be expressed by haemopoietic stem cells (HSC). The integrins α4βι and α9βι are primarily involved in the sequestration and recruitment of HSC to the bone marrow as well as the maintenance of HSC quiescence, a key characteristic for long-term repopulating stem cells. HSC regulation by α4βι and <¾βι integrins is mediated through interactions with VCAM-1 and Opn, which are expressed and/or secreted by bone-lining osteoblasts, endothelial cells and other cells of the bone marrow environment. However, as discussed in Pepinsky et al (2002) the difference in binding affinity for VCAM -1 and Opn are markedly different between α4βι and <¾βι . Small molecule inhibitors of α4βι have been implicated as effective HSC mobilization agents. However, despite the structural and functional similarities between CL^and <¾β-ι, the binding characteristics are different and hence the role of <¾βι integrin in this regard remains unexplored. In one preferred embodiment of the invention, the antagonist of ctg integrin is an antagonist of the <¾βι integrin. Integrin ctg is a protein that in humans is encoded by the ITGA9 gene. This gene encodes an alpha integrin. Integrins are heterodimeric integral membrane glycoproteins composed of an alpha chain and a beta chain that mediate cell functions. The ctg subunit forms a heterodimeric complex with a βι subunit to form the <¾βι integrin. Accordingly, it is preferred that the antagonist of ctg integrin is an antagonist of the <¾βι integrin or an active portion thereof.
As used herein, an active portion of the <¾βι integrin or of the α4βι integrin is a portion of the <¾βι protein or α4βι protein which retains activity of the integrin. That is, the portion is a part of the <¾βι protein or the α4βι protein which is less than the complete protein, but which can still act in the same or similar manner as the full <¾βι or α4βι protein. Where the term "ctg integrin" or "a4 integrin" or "<¾βι integrin" or "α4βι integrin" is used herein, it also includes reference to any active portions thereof. In another embodiment of the present invention, the antagonist of ctg integrin, preferably the <¾βι integrin is also an antagonist of a4 integrin, preferably the α4βι integrin. It is desired that the ctg integrin antagonist of the present invention can inhibit the activity of both the <¾βι integrin and α4βι integrin. Hence it is preferred that the antagonist is an <¾β-ι/α4βι integrin antagonist.
The antagonist of the ctg integrin, preferably the <¾βι integrin may be the same or different to the antagonist of the a4 integrin preferably the α4βι integrin. If the antagonist is the same, a single antagonist may be used to inhibit the activity of both the ag integrin and the a4 integrin. Separate antagonists may be used either simultaneously or sequentially to inhibit the ag integrin, preferably the <¾βι integrin and the a4 integrin, preferably the α4βι integrin.
In yet another embodiment of the invention it is preferred that the ag integrin, preferably the agPi integrin and the a4 integrin preferably the α4βι integrin are activated prior to the interaction of the integrin antagonist. The antagonist preferably interacts with intrinsically activated integrins. Therefore, it is desirable that the ag integrin is intrinsically activated. Preferably, the agPi integrin is intrinsically activated. As contemplated above, it is desirable that both the agPi integrin/a4Pi integrin are activated simultaneously or sequentially so that the integrin antagonist targets the HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated ag/a4 integrins in the endosteal niche.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the antagonist of an ag integrin, preferably the antagonist of agPi integrin, more preferably a agPia4Pi integrin comprises a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
Figure imgf000017_0001
wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and CrC4 alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H; R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(0)R9 and -C(O)NR10R1 1 ;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)-(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R10 and R1 1 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In one set of embodiments of the compound of Formula (I)
R4 is H;
R5 is -OR7;
and X, R1 , R2, R3 and R7 are as defined in Formula (I).
In such embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000019_0001
wherein:
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -S02 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and C1-C4 alkyl;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R1 3 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II):
R7 is selected from the group consisting of Ci -C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R1 3 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -0(CrC4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2. In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is selected from C1-C4 alkyl.
Exemplary C1-C4 alkyl as described herein for groups of Formula (I) or Formula (II) may be linear or branched. In some embodiments, C1-C4 alkyl may be selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl and tert-butyl.
In some embodiments, R7 may be methyl or tert-butyl, such that -OR7 is -OCH3 or -OC(CH3)3.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is -(CH2)n-R12. In such embodiments, R12 may be selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci- C4 alkyl), -C(O)-(C C4 alkyl), -C(O)O-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN, and n is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is -(CH2)n-R12, where R12 may be selected from the group consisting of -CN, -O(C C4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl, and n is 1 or 2.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is -(CH2)n-R12, where:
Figure imgf000020_0001
R12 is an optionally substituted tetrazolyl (preferably 5-tetrazolyl), and n is 1 .
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is -C(O)R13. In such embodiments, R13 may be selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl. In one set of embodiments, R13 may be an optionally substituted 5- or 6-membered cycloalkyl ring. Exemplary cycloalkyl rings may be cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
In one set of embodiments, R13 may be an optionally substituted aryl ring. An exemplary aryl ring is phenyl.
In one set of embodiments, R13 may be an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring. An exemplary heteroaryl ring is pyrrolyl. In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II), R7 is -C(0)NR14R15.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, R14 and R15 may each be independently selected from the group consisting of C1 -C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl.
In some specific embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, R14 and R15 are each ethyl or iso-propyl. In one specific embodiment of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, one of R14 and R15 is methyl and the other of R14 and R15 is phenyl.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) where R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, may form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring. In one form, the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyi ring. Particular heterocycloalkyi rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
In specific embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II) R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, where R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl ring.
In some specific embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or Formula (II): R7 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, -CN, -0(CrC4 alkyl) and 5-tetrazolyl;
R13 is 2-pyrrolyl;
R14 and R15 are each independently C1-C4 alkyl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl or morpholinyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (I), X is -S02-. In such embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (III):
Figure imgf000022_0001
(III)
wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and Ci-C4 alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R1 1 ;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)-(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN; R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R10 and R11, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (III), R4 is H and R5 is OR7 to provide a compound of Formula (Ilia):
Figure imgf000023_0001
wherein
R1, R2 and R3 are as defined in Formula (III);
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl; R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of C1 -C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In some embodiments of Formula (Ilia), R7 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl (preferably methyl or tert-butyl), -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and - C(0)NR14R15; wherein
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(CrC4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R1 3 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring; and
n is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1 , 2 and 3.
In specific embodiments of Formula (Ilia), R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, where R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring. In one form, the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyi ring. Particular heterocycloalkyi rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
In a specific embodiment of Formula (I), X is -S02-, R4 is H and R5 is -OR7, where R7 is -C(O)NR14R15 and R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinyl ring. In such embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (I I lb):
Figure imgf000025_0001
(lllb)
wherein R1 , R2 and R3 are as defined herein.
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia) or (lllb) described herein, R1 is an optionally substituted aryl. In some embodiments R1 is an optionally substituted phenyl.
In one set of embodiments, R1 is phenyl substituted with at least one halogen group. Halogen substituent groups may be selected from the group consisting of chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo, preferably chloro.
In some embodiments, R1 is phenyl substituted with a plurality of halogen groups. The halogen substituent groups may be positioned at the 3- and 5- positions of the phenyl ring.
In one embodiment, a compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (IVa) or (IVb):
Figure imgf000025_0002
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (IVa) or (IVb):
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15; R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), or (IVb) as described herein, R3 is H.
In embodiments where R3 is H, the compound of Formula (I) may have a structure of Formula (V):
Figure imgf000026_0001
(V)
wherein:
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group; R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R11 ;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15; R is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)-(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R10 and R1 1, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3. In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (V), R4 is H and R5 is OR7 to provide a compound of Formula (Va):
Figure imgf000027_0001
wherein
R2 and R7 are as defined in Formula (V).
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (Va), R7 is selected from the group consisting of C C4 alkyl (preferably methyl or tert-butyl), -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15; wherein R12, R13, R14, R15 and n are as defined herein for Formula (V). In specific embodiments of a compound of Formula (Va), R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, where R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring. In one form, the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl ring. Particular heterocycloalkyl rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (V) or (Va), X is -SO2-.
In a specific embodiment of a compound of Formula (Va), X is -SO2-, R3 and R4 are each H and R5 is -OR7, where R7 is -C(O)NR14R15 and R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinyl ring. In such embodiments, the compound of Formula V) may have a structure of Formula (Vb):
Figure imgf000028_0001
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (V) or (Va), R1 is an optionally substituted aryl, preferably an optionally substituted phenyl. The optional substituent is preferably at least one halogen group selected from the group consisting of chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo, preferably chloro.
In one set of embodiments, R1 is phenyl substituted with at least one halogen group. In some embodiments, R1 is phenyl substituted with a plurality of halogen groups. The halogen substituent groups are preferably positioned at the 3- and 5- positions of the phenyl ring.
In one embodiment, a compound of Formula (V) may have a structure of Formula (Via) or (Vlb):
Figure imgf000029_0001
(Via) (VIb) wherein in each of (Via) and (VIb), R2 and R7 are as defined in Formula (V).
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (Via) or (VIb):
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(0)R13 and -C(0)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(C C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of CrC4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
In another set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (Via) or (VIb), R7 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, tert-butyl, -(CH2)n-R12 where R12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -CH3, -C(CH3)3 and optionally substituted heteroaryl (preferably 5-tetrazolyl), and n is 1 or 2. In another set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (Via) or (VIb), R7 is -C(0)R13, where R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi (preferably cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl), optionally substituted aryl (preferably phenyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl (preferably pyrrolyl). In another set of embodiments of Formula (Via) or (Vlb), R7 is -C(0)NR14R15, where R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring. In one form, the optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring may be an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring. Particular heterocycloalkyl rings may be selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl rings.
In a specific embodiment, a compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (VII):
Figure imgf000030_0001
wherein R2 and R3 are as defined in Formula (I).
In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (I), R3 is H, which provides compounds of the following formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000030_0002
wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group.
In one form of a compound of Formula (I), R2 is H, which provides a compound following formula (IX):
Figure imgf000030_0003
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a preferred specific embodiment, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of the following formula:
Figure imgf000031_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
As described herein, in a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (Vlb), (VII) or (VIII), R2 may in some embodiments be a substituent group.
In one set of embodiments R2 is a substituent group selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, hydroxy, amino and azido, or R2 is a substituent having structure of Formula (A):
s H
|— Y-linker-N-Z . . .
wherein
Y is optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heteroaryl- C(0)NH-;
linker is selected from the group consisting of -(CH2)P- and -(CH2CH20)p- or any combination thereof;
p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4; and
Z is a fluorophore (preferably a rhodamine group).
In some embodiments of a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (Vlb), (VII) or (VII I), R2 is an optionally substituted heteroaryl. Suitable optionally substituted heteroaryl may comprise from 5 to 10 ring atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, and S. The optionally substituted heteroaryl may be monocyclic or bicyclic. In some embodiments, R2 may be a heteroaryl selected from the group consisting of pyrazole, imidazole, 1 ,2,3-triazole, 1 ,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indazole, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydroindazole and benzimidazole,
In some embodiments of a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (VIb), (VII) or (VIII), R2 is an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi. Suitable optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi may comprise from 3 to 10 ring atoms, preferably from 4 to 8 ring atoms, and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, and S. The optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi may be monocyclic or bicyclic.
In some embodiments, R2 may be an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, azepane, morpholine and thiomorpholine.
In some embodiments, R2 may be optionally substituted piperidine. In some embodiments, the piperidine may be substituted with at least one C1-C4 alkyl substituent group. In some embodiments, the C1-C4 alkyl substituent group may be methyl.
In some embodiments R2 may be selected from the group consisting of 2- methylpiperidine, 3-methylpiperidine, 4-methylpiperidine, 3,5-dimethylpiperidine and 3,3-dimethylpiperidine.
When R2 is a optionally substituted heteroaryl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi group, R2 may be linked to the pyrrolidine ring of the compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (lllb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (VIb), (VII) or (VIII), via a heteroatom on the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyi ring. For example, when R2 is a heteroaryl selected from the group consisting of pyrazole, imidazole, 1 ,2,3- triazole, 1 ,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indazole, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindazole and benzimidazole, or when R2 is a optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, azepane, morpholine and thiomorpholine, then R2 is covalently linked to the remainder of the compound via the nitrogen (N) heteroatom of the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group.
In some embodiments of a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (Ilia), (1Mb), (IVa), (IVb), (V), (Va), (Vb), (Via), (Vlb), (VII) or (VIII), R2 is a substituent group having structure of Formula (A):
H
linker— N
(A) wherein
Y is optionally substituted heteroaryl; or optionally substituted heteroaryl- C(0)NH-;
linker is selected from the group consisting of -(CH2)P- and -(CH2CH20)p- or any combination thereof;
p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4; and
Z is a fluorophore (preferably a rhodamine group).
In some embodiments Y may be selected from the group consisting of triazole or triazole-C(0)NH-.
In some embodiments Y may be triazole or triazole-C(0)NH-, such that the structure of Formula (A) is given by Formula (A1 ) or (A2):
Figure imgf000033_0001
In some embodiments linker may be selected from the group consisting of -(CH2)P- and -(CH2CH20)p- or any combination thereof, wherein p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4. In some embodiments linker may be given by Formula (A3) or (A4):
H
>— Y{CH27-N-Z (A3)
Figure imgf000034_0001
wherein p at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 4.
In some embodiments of Formulae (A), (A1 ), (A2), (A3) or (A4), Z is a rhodamine fluorophor which is selected from the following group:
Figure imgf000034_0002
In a specific embodiment, a compound of Formula (I) has the following structu
Figure imgf000034_0003
In another specific embodiment, a compound of Formula (I) has the following structure:
Figure imgf000035_0001
Without wishing to be limited by theory, it is believed that the pyrrolidine carbamate moiety in compounds of formulae described herein is important for ensuring a high binding affinity to an <¾ integrin, more particularly to an <¾βι integrin, or an active portion thereof. It is further believed that the carboxylic acid functionality is essential for antagonist activity. In the above description a number of terms are used which are well known to a skilled addressee. Nevertheless for the purposes of clarity a number of terms are defined as follows.
As used herein, the term "unsubstituted" means that there is no substituent or that the only substituents are hydrogen.
The term "optionally substituted" as used throughout the specification denotes that the group may or may not be further substituted or fused (so as to form a condensed polycyclic system), with one or more non-hydrogen substituent groups. In certain embodiments the substituent groups are one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, =0, =S, -CN, -N02, -CF3, -OCF3, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, heterocycloalkylalkenyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, cycloalkylheteroalkyl, heterocycloalkylheteroalkyl, arylheteroalkyl, heteroarylheteroalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkyloxy, alkyloxyalkyl, alkyloxycycloalkyl, alkyloxyheterocycloalkyl, alkyloxyaryl, alkyloxyheteroaryl, alkyloxycarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenyloxy, alkynyloxy, cycloalkyloxy, cycloalkenyloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, heterocycloalkenyloxy, aryloxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, heteroaryloxy, arylalkyloxy, amino, alkylamino, acylamino, aminoalkyl, arylamino, sulfonylamino, sulfinylamino, sulfonyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, sulfinyl, alkylsulfinyl, arylsulfinyl, aminosulfinylaminoalkyl, C(=0)OH, -C(=0)Re, C(=0)ORe, C(=0)NReRf, C(=NOH)Re, C(=NRe)NRfR9, NReRf, NReC(=0)Rf, NReC(=0)ORf, NReC(=0)NRfR9, NReC(=NRf)NR9Rh, NReS02Rf, -SRe, S02NReRf, -ORe, OC(=0)NReRf, OC(=0)Re and acyl,
wherein Re and Rf, R9 and Rh are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, CrC4alkyl, d-Ci2haloalkyl, C2-Ci2alkenyl, C2-Ci2alkynyl, C Ci0 heteroalkyl, C3-C6cycloalkyl, C3-Ci2cycloalkenyl, Cs-Ceheterocycloalkyl, Ci - Ci2heterocycloalkenyl, Cearyl, and Ci-Csheteroaryl, or Re and Rf, when taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic or heterocyclic ring system with 3 to 12 ring atoms.
In certain embodiments, optional substituents may be selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, -C(0)Re, -C(0)ORe, -C(0)NReRf, -ORe, -OC(0)NReRf, OC(0)Re and acyl, wherein Re and Rf are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-C4alkyl, C3-C6cycloalkyl, Cs-Ceheterocycloalkyl, Cearyl, and Ci-Csheteroaryl, or Re and Rf, when taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a cyclic or heterocyclic ring system with 3 to 12 ring atoms.
"Alkyl" as a group or part of a group refers to a straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, preferably a Ci-Ci2 alkyl, more preferably a C Cio alkyl, most preferably CrC4 unless otherwise noted. Examples of suitable straight and branched Ci-C4 alkyl substituents include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 2-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl and t-butyl. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
"Aryl" as a group or part of a group denotes (i) an optionally substituted monocyclic, or fused polycyclic, aromatic carbocycle (ring structure having ring atoms that are all carbon) preferably having from 5 to 12 atoms per ring. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, and the like; (ii) an optionally substituted partially saturated bicyclic aromatic carbocyclic moiety in which a phenyl and a Cs-7 cycloalkyl or Cs-7 cycloalkenyl group are fused together to form a cyclic structure, such as tetrahydronaphthyl, indenyl or indanyl. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group. Typically an aryl group is a C6-C18 aryl group.
A "bond" is a linkage between atoms in a compound or molecule. In one set of embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) as described herein, the bond is a single bond.
"Cycloalkyl" refers to a saturated monocyclic or fused or spiro polycyclic, carbocycle preferably containing from 3 to 9 carbons per ring, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like, unless otherwise specified. It includes monocyclic systems (such as cyclohexyl), bicyclic systems such as decalin, and polycyclic systems such as adamantane. A cycloalkyl group typically is a C3-C12 alkyl group. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group.
"Halogen" represents chlorine, fluorine, bromine or iodine. "Heteroaryl" either alone or part of a group refers to groups containing an aromatic ring (preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring) having one or more heteroatoms as ring atoms in the aromatic ring with the remainder of the ring atoms being carbon atoms. Suitable heteroatoms may be selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur. The group may be a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl group. Examples of heteroaryl include thiophene, benzothiophene, benzofuran, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, naphtho[2,3- b]thiophene, furan, isoindolizine, xantholene, phenoxatine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, tetrazole, indole, isoindole, 1 H- indazole, purine, quinoline, isoquinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, cinnoline, carbazole, phenanthridine, acridine, phenazine, thiazole, isothiazole, phenothiazine, oxazole, isooxazole, furazane, phenoxazine, 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, or 8-quinolyl, 1 -, 3-, 4-, or 5-isoquinolinyl, 1 -, 2-, or 3-indolyl, and 2- or 3-thienyl. A heteroaryl group is typically a C1-C18 heteroaryl group. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group. "Heterocycloalkyl" refers to a saturated monocyclic, bicyclic, or polycyclic ring containing at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, preferably from 1 to 3 heteroatoms in at least one ring. Each ring is preferably from 3- to 10- membered, more preferably 4- to 7-membered. Examples of suitable heterocycloalkyl include pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl, piperidyl, piperazyl, tetrahydropyranyl and morpholino. The group may be a terminal group or a bridging group. It is understood that included in the family of compounds of Formula (I) are isomeric forms including diastereomers, enantiomers and tautomers, and geometrical isomers in "E" or "Z" configuration or a mixture of E and Z isomers. It is also understood that some isomeric forms such as diastereomers, enantiomers, and geometrical isomers can be separated by physical and/or chemical methods and by those skilled in the art. For those compounds where there is the possibility of geometric isomerism the applicant has drawn the isomer that the compound is thought to be although it will be appreciated that the other isomer may be the correct structural assignment.
Some of the compounds of the disclosed embodiments may exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and/or mixtures of enantiomers and /or diastereomers. All such single stereoisomers, racemates and mixtures thereof, are intended to be within the scope of the subject matter described and claimed.
Additionally, Formula (I) is intended to cover, where applicable, solvated as well as unsolvated forms of the compounds. Thus, each formula includes compounds having the indicated structure, including the hydrated as well as the non-hydrated forms.
Formula (I) is further intended to encompass pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to salts that retain the desired biological activity of the above-identified compounds, and include pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts and base addition salts. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared from an inorganic acid or from an organic acid. Examples of such inorganic acids are hydrochloric, sulfuric, and phosphoric acid. Appropriate organic acids may be selected from aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aromatic, heterocyclic, carboxylic, and sulfonic classes of organic acids, examples of which are formic, acetic, propanoic, succinic, glycolic, gluconic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, fumaric, maleic, alkyl sulfonic, and arylsulfonic. In a similar vein base addition salts may be prepared by ways well known in the art using organic or inorganic bases. Examples of suitable organic bases include simple amines such as methylamine, ethylamine, triethylamine and the like. Examples of suitable inorganic bases include NaOH, KOH, and the like. Additional information on pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 19th Edition, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA 1995. In the case of agents that are solids, it is understood by those skilled in the art that the inventive compounds, agents and salts may exist in different crystalline or polymorphic forms, all of which are intended to be within the scope of the present invention and specified formulae.
In another preferred embodiment of the invention, there is provided a method for enhancing release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an ctg integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
Once the HSC dislodge from the BM stem cell binding ligand they are no longer anchored to the BM and available to be released from the BM and enter a cell cycle toward proliferation and differentiation. Alternatively, they can remain in the BM and enter a cell cycle in the BM.
In a further preferred embodiment, the present invention there is provided a method for enhancing mobilization of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell niche in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche. By virtue of the HSC becoming dislodged and released, the HSC become available to be mobilized to the PB. The dislodgement and release is essential to enable mobilization. An enhanced release of the HSC will enable more cells as a consequence to be mobilized.
In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the methods are conducted in the presence or absence of G-CSF. Preferably, the methods are conducted in the absence of G-CSF. Although clinically G-CSF is the most extensively used mobilization agent for HSC, its drawbacks include potentially toxic side effects, a relatively long course of treatment (5-7 days of consecutive injections), and variable responsiveness of patients. Therefore, an advantage of the invention is that effective mobilization can occur in the absence of G-CSF which substantially can avoid the toxic side effects.
"Haematopoietic stem cells" as used in the present invention means multipotent stem cells that are capable of eventually differentiating into all blood cells including, erythrocytes, leukocytes, megakaryocytes, and platelets. This may involve an intermediate stage of differentiation into progenitor cells or blast cells. Hence the terms "haematopoietic stem cells", "HSC", "haematopoietic progenitors", "HPC", "progenitor cells" or "blast cells" are used interchangeably in the present invention and describe HSCs with reduced differentiation potential, but are still capable of maturing into different cells of a specific lineage, such as myeloid or lymphoid lineage. "Haematopoietic progenitors" include erythroid burst forming units, granulocyte, erythroid, macrophage, megakaryocyte colony forming units, granulocyte, erythroid, macrophage, and granulocyte macrophage colony-forming units.
The present invention relates to enhancing the dislodgment of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand. Once dislodged, the cells can be released from the BM stem cell niche where they can remain or preferably be released and mobilized to the PB. These cells have haematopoietic reconstitution capacity. The present invention provides a method to enhance mobilization of HSC assisted by the dislodgement of the HSC from the BM stem cell binding ligand preferably nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche or from the central medullary cavity. More preferably, the HSC are mobilized from the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche as it is these cells that have been shown to give greater long term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity.
The type of cells that are dislodged, released or mobilized may also be found in murine populations selected from the group including BM derived progenitor enriched Lin-Sca-1 +ckit+ (herein referred to as LSK) cells or stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells (herein referred to as LSKSLAM). These equivalent murine populations provide an indication of the cell types that can be dislodged, released or mobilized from the BM stem cell niche by the use of an antagonist of an ctg integrin or an active portion thereof. Preferably, the cell types are equivalent to those found in a stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells (LSKSLAM). Preferably, the cells that are dislodged, released or mobilized are endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34+, CD38+, CD90+, CD133+, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells.
The present invention may be conducted in vivo or ex vivo. That is the antagonist of a9, preferably an antagonist of α9βι, more preferably an antagonist of α9βι α4βι can be administered to a subject in need in vivo or to an ex vivo sample to mobilize HSC from the BM.
"Subject" as used herein includes all animals, including mammals and other animals, including, but not limited to, companion animals, farm animals and zoo animals. The term "animal" can include any living multi-cellular vertebrate organisms, a category that includes, for example, a mammal, a bird, a simian, a dog, a cat, a horse, a cow, a rodent, and the like. Likewise, the term "mammal" includes both human and non- human mammals.
The present invention relates to enhancing HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization. "Enhancement," "enhance" or "enhancing" as used herein refers to an improvement in the performance of or other physiologically beneficial increase in a particular parameter of a cell or organism. At times, enhancement of a phenomenon may be quantified as a decrease in the measurements of a specific parameter. For example, migration of stem cells may be measured as a reduction in the number of stem cells circulating in the circulatory system, but this nonetheless may represent an enhancement in the migration of these cells to areas of the body where they may perform or facilitate a beneficial physiologic result, including, but not limited to, differentiating into cells that replace or correct lost or damaged function. At the same time, enhancement may be measured as an increase of any one cell type in the peripheral blood as a result of migration of the HSC from the BM to the PB. Enhancement may refer to a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45% or greater than 50% reduction in the number of circulating stem cells or in the alternative may represent a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45% or greater than 50% increase in the number of circulating stem cells. Enhancement of stem cell migration may result in or be measured by a decrease in a population of the cells of a non-haematopoietic lineage, such as a 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%,55%, 60%, 70%, 75% or greater decrease in the population of cells or the response of the population of cells. Put another way, an enhanced parameter may be considered as the trafficking of stem cells. In one embodiment, the enhanced parameter is the release of stem cells from a tissue of origin such as the BM. In one embodiment, an enhanced parameter is the migration of stem cells. In another embodiment, the parameter is the differentiation of stem cells.
In one embodiment, the <¾ integrin antagonist is administered intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, transdermally, transmucosally or intraperitoneally; optionally the antagonist is administered intravenously or subcutaneously.
In yet another aspect of the invention there is provided a composition for use in enhancing dislodgement of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche in a subject said composition comprising an antagonist of <¾ integrin as herein described. More preferably, the antagonist is an <¾ integrin antagonist as herein described. Most preferably, the antagonist is an α4βι α9βι antagonist as herein described. In a preferred embodiment, the composition enhances release of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche. More preferably, the composition enhances mobility or mobilization of HSC from a BM stem cell niche to the PB. The composition may be a pharmaceutical composition further including a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein may be provided in the composition alone or in combination with a further antagonist of ctg integrin, a4 integrin, <¾βι integrin, α4βι integrin or it may be a combined antagonist of <¾β-ι/α4βι integrin. The antagonists may be the same or different, but will all act as antagonists of at least the ctg integrin.
In another aspect of the present invention there is provided a use of an antagonist of <¾ integrin as described herein in the preparation of a medicament for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a patient.
The methods described herein include the manufacture and use of compositions and pharmaceutical compositions, which include antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein as active ingredients for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand. Preferably the release of the HSC is enhanced. More preferably, the HSC mobilization is enhanced. Pharmaceutical compositions typically include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" includes saline, solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration that are known to the skilled addressee. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions, e.g., growth factors such as G-CSF. Pharmaceutical compositions are typically formulated to be compatible with the intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, transdermal (topical), transmucosal, intraperitoneal and rectal administration. Preferably, the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein are administered subcutaneously. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are formulated to target delivery of the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein to the bone marrow, preferably to the BM stem cell niche, and more preferably to the endosteal niche of the BM stem cell niche. For example, in some embodiments, the antagonists of ctg integrin as described herein may be formulated in liposomes, nanosuspensions and inclusion complexes (e.g. with cyclodextrins), which can effect more targeted delivery to the BM while reducing side effects. The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
In yet another aspect of the invention there is provided a method of harvesting HSC from a subject said method comprising:
administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin or an active portion thereof as described herein to a subject wherein said effective amount enhances dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a
BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche;
mobilizing the dislodged HSC to PB; and
harvesting the HSC from the PB.
Preferably, the ctg integrin antagonist is administered in the absence of G-CSF.
The use of compounds such as <¾βι integrin antagonists as herein described to enhance dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in the BM stem cell niche allows for the cells to eventually mobilize to the PB for further collection. The cells may naturally mobilize and egress from the BM or they may be stimulated to mobilize by the use of other HSC mobilizing agents such as, but not limited to interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF).
In one embodiment, it is considered that the cells once harvested can be returned to the body to supplement or replenish a patient's haematopoietic progenitor cell population (homologous or autologous transplantation) or alternatively be transplanted to another patient to replenish their haematopoietic progenitor cell population (heterologous or allogeneic transplantation). This can be advantageous, in the instance following a period where an individual has undergone chemotherapy. Furthermore, there are certain genetic conditions such as thalassemias, sickle cell anemia, Dyskeratosis congenital, Shwachman-Diamond syndrome, and Diamond- Blackfan anemia wherein HSC and HPC numbers are decreased. Hence the methods of the invention in enhancing HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization may be useful and applicable. The recipient of a bone marrow transplant may have limited bone marrow reserve such as elderly subjects or subjects previously exposed to an immune depleting treatment such as chemotherapy. They may have a decreased blood cell level or is at risk for developing a decreased blood cell level as compared to a control blood cell level. As used herein the term control blood cell level refers to an average level of blood cells in a subject prior to or in the substantial absence of an event that changes blood cell levels in the subject. An event that changes blood cell levels in a subject includes, for example, anaemia, trauma, chemotherapy, bone marrow transplant and radiation therapy. For example, the subject has anaemia or blood loss due to, for example, trauma.
Typically, an effective amount of an <¾ integrin antagonist such as an <¾βι integrin antagonist, more preferably a α9βι α4βι integrin antagonist is administered to a donor to induce dislodgement, release or preferably mobilization of HSC from the BM and release and mobilize to the PB. Once the HSC are mobilized to the PB, collection of the blood and separation of HSC can proceed using methods generally available for blood donation, such as, but not limited to those techniques employed in Blood Banks. In some embodiments, once PB or BM is obtained from a subject who has been treated using an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein, the HSC can be isolated therefrom, using a standard method such as apheresis or leukapheresis.
Preferably the effective amount of the ctg integrin antagonist is in the range of 25 - 1000μg kg body weight, more preferably 50 - 500μg kg body weight, most preferably 50 - 250μg kg body weight. The effective amount may be selected from the group including 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 1 10, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240 or 250μg/kg body weight.
Dislodgement, release or preferably mobilization may occur immediately, depending on the amount of ctg integrin antagonist used. However, the HSC may be harvested in approximately 1 hours' time after administration. The actual time and amount of the ctg integrin antagonist may vary depending upon a variety of factors, including but not limited to the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect) and the route of administration. One skilled in the clinical and pharmacological arts will be able to determine an effective amount through routine experimentation and use of control curves.
As considered in the present invention, the term "control curve" is considered to refer to statistical and mathematically relevant curves generated through the measurement of HSC dislodgement, release or mobilization characteristics of different concentrations of ctg integrin antagonist under identical conditions, and wherein the cells can be harvested and counted over regular time intervals. These "control curves" as considered in the present invention can be used as one method to estimate different concentrations for administering in subsequent occasions.
As considered in the present invention, the terms "harvesting haematopoietic stem cells", "harvesting haematopoietic progenitor cells", "harvesting HSC" or "harvesting HPC" are considered to refer to the separation of cells from the PB and are considered as techniques to which the person skilled in the art would be aware. The cells are optionally collected, separated, and optionally further expanded generating even larger populations of HSC and differentiated progeny.
In another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a cell composition comprising HSC obtained from a method as described herein said method comprising administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as herein described to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB. As a consequence of enhanced dislodgement of the HSC, it is postulated that more HSC can be released to the BM stem cell niche for subsequent mobilization to the PB. Therefore the cell compositions harvested from a subject that has been administered an effective amount of an antagonist of an ctg integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche will be enriched with HSC.
Preferably the cell composition will be enriched with cells of the endosteal niche and are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group comprising CD34+, CD38+, CD90+, CD133+, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells.
In yet another aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for the treatment of haematological disorders said method comprising administering a cell composition comprising HSC obtained from a method as described herein said method comprising administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
In yet another aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for the treatment of haematological disorders in a subject said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to the subject to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB. In yet another preferred embodiment, the haematological disorder is a haemaopoietic neoplastic disorder and the method involves chemosensitizing the HSC to alter susceptibility of the HSC, such that a chemotherapeutic agent, having become ineffective, becomes more effective. A long standing issue in the treatment of leukemia is the concept that malignant cells in a dormant state are likely to evade the effects of cytotoxic agents, rendering them capable of driving relapse. Whilst much effort has gone into understanding the control of cancer cell dormancy, very little has concentrated on the role of the microenvironment and in particular the bone marrow stem cell niche. Recently, data has emerged demonstrating that the extracellular matrix molecule osteopontin, known to anchor normal haematopoietic stem cells in the bone marrow, also plays a role in supporting leukaemic cell, in particular acute lymphoblastic leukaemia (ALL), dormancy by anchoring these in key regions of the bone marrow microenvironment. Furthermore, additional data shows that relapsed ALL have significantly elevated levels of the integrin α4βι . These data provided herein suggest that an agent that competes with the interaction of ctgPi and its extracellular matrix ligands will induce these cells into cell cycle, rendering them vulnerable to cytotoxic chemotherapy. The methods described herein include in some embodiments methods for the treatment of subjects with haematological disorders who are in need of increased numbers of stem cells. In some other embodiments, the subject is scheduled to or intends to donate stem cells such as HSC e.g., for use in heterologous or autologous transplantation. Generally, the methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein, to a subject who is in need of, or who has been determined to be in need of, such treatment. Administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of <¾ integrin preferably an <¾βι antagonist, more preferably an antagonist of a α9βι α4βι integrin as described herein for the treatment of such subjects will result in an increased number and/or frequency of HSC in the PB or BM.
"Treat," "treating" and "treatment" as used herein refer to both therapeutic treatment and prophylactic or preventative measures, wherein the aim is to prevent or slow down (lessen) the targeted condition, disease or disorder (collectively "ailment") even if the treatment is ultimately unsuccessful. Those in need of treatment may include those already with the ailment as well as those prone to have the ailment or those in whom the ailment is to be prevented.
An "effective amount" is an amount sufficient to effect a significant increase or decrease in the number and/or frequency of HSC in the PB or BM. An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages.
"Therapeutically effective amount" as used herein refers to the quantity of a specified composition, or active agent in the composition, sufficient to achieve a desired effect in a subject being treated. For example, this can be the amount effective for enhancing migration of HSC that replenish, repair, or rejuvenate tissue. In another embodiment, a "therapeutically effective amount" is an amount effective for enhancing trafficking of HSC, such as increasing release of HSC, as can be demonstrated by elevated levels of circulating stem cells in the bloodstream. In still another embodiment, the "therapeutically effective amount" is an amount effective for enhancing homing and migration of HSC from the circulatory system to various tissues or organs, as can be demonstrated be decreased level of circulating HSC in the bloodstream and/or expression of surface markers related to homing and migration. A therapeutically effective amount may vary depending upon a variety of factors, including but not limited to the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, desired clinical effect) and the route of administration. One skilled in the clinical and pharmacological arts will be able to determine a therapeutically effective amount through routine experimentation.
The compositions can be administered one from one or more times per day to one or more times per week; including once every other day. The skilled artisan will appreciate that certain factors may influence the dosage and timing required to effectively treat a subject, including but not limited to previous treatments, the general health and/or age of the subject, and other diseases present. Moreover, treatment of a subject with an effective amount of the compositions described herein can include a single treatment or a series of treatments. In some embodiments, such administration will result in an increase of about 10-200- fold in the number of HSC in the PB.
Dosage, toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of the compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures, e.g., in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds that exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects. The data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the antagonists of ag integrin as described herein that achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
In some embodiments, the methods of treatment described herein include administering another HSC mobilizing agent, e.g., an agent selected from the group consisting of, but not limited to, interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF). Preferably, the ag integrin antagonist may be administered with G-CSF. In some embodiments, the methods include administering the isolated stem cells to a subject, such as reintroducing the cells into the same subject or transplanting the cells into a second subject, e.g., an HLA type-matched second subject, an allograft
The present invention includes administering an ag integrin antagonist directly to a patient to mobilize their own HSC or using HSC from another donor treated with an ag integrin antagonist from which HSC have been harvested.
In some embodiments, the subject administered an antagonist of ag integrin as described herein is healthy. In other embodiments, the subject is suffering from a disease or physiological condition, such as immunosuppression, chronic illness, traumatic injury, degenerative disease, infection, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the subject may suffer from a disease or condition of the skin, digestive system, nervous system, lymph system, cardiovascular system, endocrine system, or combinations thereof.
In specific embodiments, the subject suffers from osteoporosis, Alzheimer's disease, cardiac infarction, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, multiple sclerosis, cirrhosis of the liver, or combinations thereof.
Administration of a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein may prevent, treat and/or lessen the severity of or otherwise provide a beneficial clinical benefit with respect to any of the aforementioned conditions, although the application of the methods and use of the an antagonist of <¾ integrin as described herein is not limited to these uses. In various embodiments, the compositions and methods find therapeutic utility in the treatment of, among other things, skeletal tissues such as bone, cartilage, tendon and ligament, as well as degenerative diseases, such as Parkinson's and diabetes. Enhancing the release, circulation, homing and/or migration of stem cells from the blood to the tissues may lead to more efficient delivery of HSC to a defective site for increased repair efficiency.
In some embodiments subjects that can usefully be treated using the HSC, PB or BM include any subjects who can be normally treated with a bone marrow or stem cell transplant, e.g., subjects who have cancers, e.g., neuroblastoma (cancer that arises in immature nerve cells and affects mostly infants and children), myelodysplasia, myelofibrosis, breast cancer, renal cell carcinoma, or multiple myeloma. For example, the cells can be transplanted into subjects who have cancers that are resistant to treatment with radiation therapy or chemotherapy, e.g., to restore stem cells that were destroyed by high doses of chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy used to treat the cancers or non-responders to G-CSF treatment to mobilize HSC.
In some embodiments, the subject has a haematopoietic neoplastic disorder. As used herein, the term "haematopoietic neoplastic disorders" includes diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of haematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof. In some embodiments, the diseases arise from poorly differentiated acute leukemias, e.g., erythroblastic leukemia and acute megakaryoblastic leukemia. Additional exemplary myeloid disorders include, but are not limited to, acute promyeloid leukemia (APML), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML); lymphoid malignancies include, but are not limited to acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL) which includes B-lineage ALL and T- lineage ALL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia (PLL), hairy cell leukemia (HLL) and Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM). Additional forms of malignant lymphomas include, but are not Limited to Hodgkin's Disease and Medium/High grade (aggressive) Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma and variants thereof, peripheral T cell lymphomas, adult T cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATL), cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL), large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGF), Hodgkin's disease and Reed- Sternberg disease. In general, the methods will include administering the cell compositions, or dislodging, releasing or mobilizing stem cells to restore stem cells that were destroyed by high doses of chemotherapy and/or radiation therapy, e.g., therapy used to treat the disorders. Alternatively, the HSC are dislodged, released or mobilized from the BM stem cell niche and chemosensitized whilst entering a cell cycle either in the BM or the PB. Preferably, the haematopoietic neoplastic disorder is ALL.
In some embodiments, the BM, PB or HSC are used to treat a subject who has an autoimmune disease, e.g., multiple sclerosis (MS), myasthenia gravis, autoimmune neuropathy, scleroderma, aplastic anemia, and systemic lupus erythematosus.
In some embodiments, the subject who is treated has a non-malignant disorder such as aplastic anemia, a hemoglobinopathy, including sickle cell anemia, or an immune deficiency disorder. The present invention further provides a dosing regimen. In one embodiment, the dosing regimen is dependent on the severity and responsiveness of a disease state to be treated, with the course of treatment lasting from a single administration to repeated administration over several days and/or weeks. In another embodiment, the dosing regimen is dependent on the number of circulating CD34+ HSCs in the peripheral blood stream of a subject. In another embodiment, the dosing regimen is dependent on the number of circulating bone marrow-derived stem cells in the peripheral blood stream of a subject. For instance, the degree of mobility of the HSC from the BM may be dependent on the number of HSC already circulating in the PB.
The present invention further provides a method of enhancing the trafficking of HSC in a subject said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of ctg integrin as herein described to a subject. In one embodiment, the level of trafficking of HSC relates to the number of circulating CD34+ HSCs in the peripheral blood of a subject. In another embodiment, the level of trafficking of HSC relates to the number of circulating bone marrow-derived HSCs in the peripheral blood of a subject.
The present invention further provides a method of inducing a transient increase in the population of circulating HSC, such as endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34+, CD38+, CD90+, CD133+, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells following administration of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to a subject. In one embodiment, providing an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein to a subject will enhance release of that subject's HSC within a certain time period, such as less than 12 days, less than 6 days, less than 3 days, less than 2 days, or less than 1 day, less than 12 hours, less than 6 hours, less than about 4 hours, less than about 2 hours, or less than about 1 hour following administration. In one embodiment, administration of an antagonist of ctg integrin as described herein results in the release of HSC into the circulation from about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes following administration. Preferably, the release of HSC will be about 60 minutes following administration. In another embodiment, released HSC enter the circulatory system and increase the number of circulating HSC within the subject's body. In another embodiment, the percentage increase in the number of circulating HSC compared to a normal baseline may be about 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or about 100% or greater than about 100% increase as compared to a control. In one embodiment, the control is a base line value from the same subject. In another embodiment, the control is the number of circulating stem cells or HSC in an untreated subject, or in a subject treated with a placebo or a pharmacological carrier.
In another aspect of the invention there is provided a method of transplanting HSC into a patient, said method comprising
administering an <¾ integrin antagonist to a subject to dislodge HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand;
releasing and mobilizing the HSC from the BM to the PB;
harvesting HSC from the PB from the subject; and
transplanting the HSC to the patient.
In one embodiment, it is considered that the cells once harvested provide a cell composition that can be returned to the body to supplement or replenish a subject's haematopoietic progenitor cell population or alternatively be transplanted to another subject to replenish their haematopoietic progenitor cell population. This can be advantageous, in the instance following a period where an individual has undergone chemotherapy.
In one embodiment the method relates specifically to transplanting a subset of HSC. These cells have haematopoietic reconstitution capacity and reside in BM in the stem cell niche. The present invention provides a method to transplant the HSC from the stem cell niche preferably nearest the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche or from the central medullary cavity. More preferably, the HSC are transplanted from the bone/BM interface within the endosteal niche as it is these cells that have been shown to give greater long term, multi-lineage haematopoietic reconstitution relative to HSC isolated from the central medullary cavity. Preferably the cells that are transplanted are found in the stem cell niche, more preferably the central or endosteal niche. The equivalent type of cells that may be transplanted may be found in murine populations selected from the group including BM derived progenitor enriched Lin- Sca-1 +ckit+ (herein referred to as LSK) cells or stem cell enriched LSKCD150+CD48- cells (herein referred to as LSKSLAM). Preferably, the cells that are transplanted are endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34+, CD38+, CD90+, CD133+, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells. The discussion of documents, acts, materials, devices, articles and the like is included in this specification solely for the purpose of providing a context for the present invention. It is not suggested or represented that any or all of these matters formed part of the prior art base or were common general knowledge in the field relevant to the present invention as it existed before the priority date of each claim of this application.
Where the terms "comprise", "comprises", "comprised" or "comprising" are used in this specification (including the claims) they are to be interpreted as specifying the presence of the stated features, integers, steps or components, but not precluding the presence of one or more other features, integers, steps or components, or group thereof.
The present invention will now be more fully described by reference to the following non-limiting Examples.
EXAMPLES
Methods
(i) Flow cytometry
Flow cytometric analysis was performed using an LSR II (BD Biosciences) as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59. R-BC154 was detected at 585 nm and excited with the yellow-green laser (561 nm). For BM and PB analysis, up to 5 χ 106 cells were analysed at a rate of 10-20k cell events/sec. For analysis of PB LSKSLAM, up to 1 106 events were saved. Cell sorting was performed on a Cytopeia Influx (BD) as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al.
(ii) Cell lines
Stable LN18 cells ((ATCC number: CRL-2610) over-expressing integrin α4βι (LN18 α4βι) or α9βι (LN18 α9βι )) were generated by retroviral transduction using the pMSCV-hlTGA4-IRES-hlTGB1 and pMSCV-hlTGA9-IRES-hlTGB1 vectors as previously described in J Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59 and were maintained in DMEM supplemented with 2mM L-glutamate in 10% FBS. Transduced cells were selected by two rounds of FACS using 2.5 pg ml-1 PE-Cy5-conjugated mouse-anti-human a4 antibody (BD Bioscience) or 20 pg ml-1 of mouse-anti- human α9βι antibody (Millipore) in PBS-2% FBS, followed by 0.5 pg ml-1 of PE-conjugated goat-anti-mouse IgG (BD Bio-science). Silencing of a4 expression in LN18 and LN18 α9βι cells was performed as described above using pSM2c-shlTGA4 (Open Biosystems). a4-silenced LN18 cells (control cell line; LN18 SiA4) and LN18 α9βι (LN18 agPiSiA4) were negatively selected for a4 expression using FACS.
(iii) Immunohistochemistry
(a) Antibody staining.
LN18 SiA4 (control cell line), LN18 a4Pi ,and LN18 ctgPicells were stained with 2.5 pg ml-1 of mouse-anti-human a4 antibody (BD Bioscience), 4 pg ml-1 of mouse-anti- human ctgPi antibody (Millipore) or 4 pg ml-1 of mouse isotype control (BD Bioscience) in PBS-2% FBS for one hour, followed by 5 pg ml-1 of Alexa Fluor 594 conjugated goat-anti-mouse lgG1 for 1 h and then washed with PBS-2% FBS three times.
(b) Antibody Cocktails.
For analysis of R-BC154 binding to murine progenitor cells (LSK; Lineage"Sca-1 +c- kit+) and HSC (LSKSLAM; LSKCD150+CD48"), BM and PB cells were immunolabelled with a lineage cocktail (anti-Terl 19, anti-B220, anti-CD3, anti-Gr-1 , anti-Mac-1 ), anti-Sca-1 , anti-c-kit, anti-CD48 and anti-CD150. For lineage analysis, cells were stained separately for T-cells using anti-CD3, B-cells using anti-B220, macrophages using anti-Mac-1 and granulocytes using anti-Gr-1 . Alternatively, lineage analysis was also performed using a cocktail containing anti-CD3/B220 (PB conjugated) and anti-B220/Gr1/Mac-1 (AF647 conjugated), whereby B220+ cells were identified as +/+ cells, CD3+ cells are +/- and Gr1/Mac-1 + cells are -/+ populations. For analysis of human WBC from cord blood MNCs or BM and PB from humanised NSG mice, cells were immunolabelled with a lineage cocktail containing anti- huCD3/CD14/CD15 (all AF488 conjugated), anti-CD14/CD15/CD19/CD20 (all AF647 conjugated), anti-huCD45-PB, anti-muCD45-BV510 and anti-huCD34-PECy7. A full list of conjugated antibodies used is detailed in Table 1 and 2. Table 1. Anti-mouse antibodies
Figure imgf000057_0001
Figure imgf000058_0001
Table 2. Anti-human antibodies
Figure imgf000059_0001
(c) R-BC154 (25) staining.
Cultured LN18 SiA4 (control cell line), LN18 α4βι , and LN18 α9βι cells were treated with R-BC154 (50 nM) in TBS-2% FBS (50 mM TrisHCI, 150 mM NaCI, 2 mM glucose, 10 mM Hepes, pH 7.4) containing 1 mM CaCI2-MgCI2 or 1 mM MnCI2) and incubated for 20 min at 37 and then washed with TBS-2% FBS three times. The stained cells were fixed with 4% paraformaldehyde in PBS for 5 min, washed with water three times and then stained with 2.5 μg ml-1 of DAPI. The cells were mounted in Vectorshield, washed with water, coverslipped and stored at 4 °C overnight before images were taken under fluorescent microscope (Olympus BX51 ).
(iv) Saturation binding experiments
Cultured α4βι , α9βι and control LN18 cells (0.5 106 cells) were treated with 100 μΙ of either compound 22 or 25 (R-BC154) at 0, 1 , 3, 10, 30 and 100 nM in TBS-2% FBS (containing either no cations, 1 mM CaCI2-MgCI2 or 1 mM MnCI2). The cells were incubated at 37 for 60 min, washed once with TBS -2% FBS, dry pelleted and resuspended in the relevant binding buffer for flow cytometric analysis. Mean channel fluorescence was plotted against concentration and fitted to a one-site saturation ligand binding curve using GraphPad Prism 6. The dissociation constant, Kd was determined from the curves. (v) Off-rate kinetics measurements
Eppendorf vials containing α4βι or α9βι LN18 cells (0.5 106 cells) were treated with 50 nM of R-BC154 (100 μΙ in TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI2-MgCI2 or 1 mM MnCI2 at 37 Ό until for 30 min, washed once with the re levant binding buffer and dry pelleted. The cells were treated with 500 nM of an unlabelled competing inhibitor (100 μΙ, in TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI2-MgCI2 or 1 mM MnCI2) at 37 Ό for the times indicated (0, 2.5, 5, 15, 30, 45, 60 min). The cells were diluted with cold TBS-2% FBS (containing the relevant cations), pelleted by centrifugation, washed once and resuspended (-200 μΙ) in binding buffer for flow cytometric analysis. Mean channel fluorescence was plotted against time and the data was fitted to either a one-phase or two-phase exponential decay function using GraphPad Prism 6. The off-rate, k0ff was extrapolated from the curves. (vi) On-rate kinetics measurements
Eppendorf vials containing α4βι or α9βι LN18 cells (0.5 χ 106cells) in 50 μΙ TBS-2% FBS containing either 1 mM CaCI2-MgCI2 or 1 mM MnCI2 were pre-activated in a heating block for 20 min at 37 Ό. 100 nM R-BC154 (50 μΙ - final concentration = 50 nM) in the relevant TBS-2% FBS (with relevant cations) was added to each tube and after 0, 0.5, 1 , 2, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 min incubation at 37 Ό, the tubes were quenched by the addition of 3 ml of TBS-2% FBS (with relevant cations). The cells were washed once TBS-2% FBS (with relevant cations), pelleted by centrifugation and resuspended (200 μΙ) in the relevant binding buffer for flow cytometric analysis. Mean channel fluorescence was plotted against time and the data was fitted to either a one-phase or two phase association function using GraphPad Prism 6. The observed on-rate, k0bs was extrapolated from the curves and kon was calculated using
(kobs - k0ff)/[R-BC154 = 50 nM].
(vii) Mice
C57BI/6 mice were bred at Monash Animal Services (Monash University, Clayton, Australia). Mice were 6-8 weeks old and sex-matched for experiments. All experiments were approved by Monash Animal Research Platform ethics committee (MARP/2012/128). C57BI/6 (C57), RFP, GFP and α4α^°* vav-cre mice were bred at Monash Animal Services (Monash University, Clayton, Australia). Red fluorescent protein (RFP) mice were provided by Professor Patrick Tarn (Children's Medical Research Institute, Sydney, Australia). Conditional a4 flox/flox/a9 flox/flox mjce were initially generated by cross breeding a4flox flox mice (gift from Thalia Papayannopoulou, University of Washington, Department of Medicine/Hematology, Seattle, WA) with a9 flox flox mice (kind gift from Dean Sheppard , Department of Medicine, University of California, SF) and vav-cre mice (kind gift from Warren Alexander, WEHI Institute, Melbourne). NODSI L2RY_ " (NSG) mice were obtained in-house (Australian Regenerative Medicine Institute). Humanised NSG mice were generated by tail vein injection of freshly sorted cord blood CD34+ cells (>150k) with 2 χ 106 irradiated mononuclear support cells. After 4-5 weeks post-transplantation, NSG mice were eyebled and assessed huCD45 and muCD45, and CD34 engraftment. For transplant experimentations using C57BI/6 mice, irradiation was performed in a split dose (5.25 Gy each) 6 hours apart, 24 hours before transplantation. A total of 2 χ 105 irradiated (15 Gy) C57 BM cells were used as carrier cells for every recipient. All experiments were approved by Monash Animal Services ethics committee.
(viii) In vivo bone marrow binding assay
R-BC154 (25) in PBS (10 mg kg-1 ) was injected intravenously into C57 mice. After 5 min, bone marrow cells were isolated as previously described in D. N. Haylock et al Stem Cells, 2007, 25, 1062-1069 and J. Grassinger, et al Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218- 225. Briefly, one femur, tibia and iliac crest were excised and cleaned of muscle. After removing the epi- and metaphyseal regions, bones were flushed with PBS-2% FBS to obtain whole bone marrow, which were washed with PBS-2% FBS and then immunolabelled for flow cytometry. For analysis of R-BC154 binding, the following antibody combinations were chosen to minimise emission spectra overlap. For staining progenitor cells (LSK; Lineage-Sca-1 +c-kit+) and HSC (LSKSLAM; LSKCD150+CD48-), cells were labelled with a lineage cocktail (CD3, Ter-1 19, Gr-1 , Mac-1 , B220; all antibodies APC-Cy7 conjugated), anti-Sca-1 -PB, anti-c-kit-AF647, anti-CD48-FITC and anti-CD150-BV650. (ix) Haematopoietic cell isolation.
Populations of endosteal and central murine bone marrow cells were isolated as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218-225 and D. N. Haylock et al Stem Cells, 2007, 25, 1062-1069. Briefly, one femur, tibia and iliac bone were excised and cleaned of muscle. After removing the epi- and metaphyseal regions, bones were flushed with PBS-2%FBS to obtain central bone marrow cells. Flushed long bones and epi- and metaphyseal fragments were pooled and crushed using a mortar and pestle. Bone fragments were digested with Collagenase I (3 mg/ml) and Dispase II (4 mg/ml) at 37 in an orbi tal shaker at 750 rpm. After 5 min, bone fragments were washed once with PBS and once with PBS 2%FBS to collect the endosteal bone marrow cells. Peripheral blood was collected by retro-orbital puncture and red blood cells were lysed using NH4CI lysis buffer for 5 min at room temperature. Isolated cell populations were washed with PBS 2%FBS and then stained for flow cytometry as described in Antibody Cocktails above.
(x) Isolation of human CD34+ cells
Mononuclear cells (MNC) were isolated from cord blood as previously described in Nilsson, S. K. et al Blood 106, 1232-1239, (2005) and Grassinger, J. et al. Blood 1 14, 49-59, (2009). MNCs were incubated with a lineage antibody cocktail containing mouse anti-human CD3, CD1 1 b, CD14, CD16, CD20, CD24, and CD235a (BD) and then treated with two rounds of Dynal sheep anti-mouse IgG beads (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA) at a ratio of 2 beads per cell for 5 min and then 10 min at A°C with constant rotation. Enriched MNC were stained with CD34-fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) CD34+ cells purified by FACS.
(xi) In vitro and in vivo R-BC154 binding.
For in vitro labelling experiments, 5 χ 106 BM cells from C57 mice, conditional α4_/ α9_/" mice and humanised NODSCI D I L2RY_/" mice and human cord blood MNCs were treated with R-BC154 (up to 100 nM) in PBS (0.5% BSA) containing either 1 mM CaCI2/MgCI2 (activating) or 10 mM EDTA (deactivating) at 40 χ 106 cells/ml for 20 mins at 4 °C. Cells were washed with cold PBS (2%F BS) and then immunolabelled as described in "Antibody Cocktails" prior to flow cytometric analysis. For in vivo experiments, C57BL/6 mice,
Figure imgf000062_0001
vav-cre mice and humanised NODSCI D I L2RY_ " mice received either intravenous or subcutaneous injections of R- BC154 (10 mg/kg) at 100 ul/10 gm mouse weight and analysed as described above.
R-BC154 binding analysis on sorted populations of progenitor cells (LSK cells) by fluorescence microscopy were performed wherein, BM cells harvested from untreated and R-BC154 injected mice were lineage depleted for B220, Gr-1 , Mac-1 and Ter- 1 19, stained with anti-Sca-1 -PB and anti-c-kit-FITC and sorted on Sca1 +c-kit+ Sorted cells were imaged using an Olympus BX51 microscope. (xii) Competitive inhibition assays.
a4Piand α9βι LN18 cells (1 -2 105 cells) were treated with 50 nM of R-BC154 (80 μΙ in PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI2/MgCI2) at 37 Ό for 10 mins, washed with PBS, pelleted by centrifugation and then treated with BOP (80 μΙ, PBS-2% FBS containing 1 mM CaCI2/MgCI2) at 0, 0.01 , 0.1 , 0.3, 1 , 10, 100 and 300 nM. Cells were incubated for 90 min at 37 , washed with PBS, pel leted by centrifugation and resuspended in PBS (200 μΙ) for flow cytometric analysis. %Max mean fluorescence intensity (MFI) was plotted against the log concentration of BOP and the data fitted to a ligand binding-sigmoidal dose-response curve and IC50 values obtained from graphs. For competitive displacement of R-BC154 binding to LSK and LSKSLAM cells, WBM cells isolated from mice injected with R-BC154 were treated with 500 nM BOP in PBS (containing 0.5% BSA and 1 mM CaCI2/MgCI2) for 45 mins at 37 prior to flow cytometric analysis.
(xiii) Mobilization protocols
For mobilization experiments, all mice received subcutaneous injections at 100 μΙ/10 gm body weight and PB was harvested by throat bleed using EDTA coated syringes.
(a) R-BC154 and BOP. Mice received a single injection of freshly prepared solutions of R-BC154 and BOP in saline at the doses indicated before PB was harvested by throat bleed at the times indicated.
G-CSF. Mice received G-CSF at 250 μg/kg twice daily (500 ug/kg/day), 6-8 apart for 4 consecutive days. Groups receiving G-CSF and BOP received the standard G-CSF regime as described above followed by a single injection of BOP 1 h prior to harvest. Control mice received an equal volume of saline.
(xiv) Mobilization of humanised NODSIL2Ry (NSG) mice
Humanised NSG mice were generated by tail vein injection of freshly sorted cord blood CD34+ cells (>150k) with 2 χ 106 irradiated mononuclear support cells. After 4- 5 weeks post-transplantation, NSG mice were eyebled and assessed for huCD45 and muCD45. Under these conditions, >90% humanisation was achieved as determined by flow cytometric analysis based on %huCD45 relative to total %CD45. Humanised NSG mice were given at least 1 week to recover prior to experimentation. Mice were mobilized under the relevant conditions specified in "Mobilization protocols" and PB subsequently collected by throatbleed, lysed and immunolabelled as described in "Antibody cocktails". (xv) Low- and high-proliferative potential colony-forming cell assays
Low- and high-proliferative potential colony-forming cells (LPP-CFC and HPP-CFC, respectively) were assayed as previously described in J. Grassinger et al Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218-225 and Bartelmez, S. H. et al Experimental Hematology 17, 240-245 (1989). Briefly, mobilized PB were lysed and 4000 WBCs were plated in 35mm Petri dishes in a double-layer nutrient agar culture system containing recombinant mouse stem cell factor and recombinant human colony-stimulating factor-1 , interleukin-1 oc (IL-1 oc), and IL-3. Cultures were incubated at 37°C in a humidified incubator at 5% 02, 10% CO2, 85% N2. LPP-CFC and HPP-CFC were enumerated at 14 days of incubation as previously described in J. Grassinger, et al (2012).
(xvi) Long-term transplant assays
(a) Limiting dilution analysis.
RFP mice were treated with BOP (n = 15) and PB harvested after 1 h. PB from each donor mouse per treatment group were pooled, lysed and taken up at 1/3 of the original blood volume in PBS. Irradiated WBM filler cells (2 χ 105/mouse) were added to aliquots of lysed PB at the specified transplant volume and then topped up with PBS to allow 200 μΙ injection/mouse. Irradiated C57BL/6 mice were administered by tail vein injection and multi-lineage RFP engraftment assessed at 6, 12 and 20 weeks post-transplant. (b) Competitive primary and secondary transplant assay.
RFP (n = 5) and GFP (n = 5) mice were treated with BOP (1 h) and G-CSF (twice daily for 4 d), respectively as described in "Mobilization protocols". PB was then harvested and blood within RFP and GFP groups were pooled, lysed, washed and resuspended to 1/3 of the original blood volume in PBS. Equal volumes of RFP and GFP blood were mixed to allow transplantation of 500 μΙ of RFP and GFP blood per mouse. Irradiated WBM filler cells (2 χ 105/mouse) were added and the mixture topped up in PBS to allow 200 μΙ injection/mouse. Irradiated C57BL/6 recipients (n = 5) were administered by tail vein injection and RFP and GFP engraftment assessed at 6, 12 and 20 weeks post-transplant. At 20 weeks takedown, WBM cells (1/10th of a femur) from each primary recipient (n = 5) was transplanted into irradiated C57 secondary recipients (n = 4/primary recipient) and assessed for multi-lineage engraftment at 6, 12 and 20 weeks post-transplant.
(xvii) Statistical analysis
Data were analyzed using student's t-test, one-way or two-way ANOVA where appropriate for the data set. For determination of stem cell repopulation frequency, Poisson analysis using L-CALC software (Stem Cell Technologies) was performed. Log-rank (Mantel-Cox) test was used to compare survival curves. p<0.05 was considered significant.
Example 1 : Preparation of α9βι Integrin Antagonists
(a) Synthesis of Antagonist Compounds
The agents of the various embodiments may be prepared using the reaction routes and synthesis schemes as described below. The preparation of particular compounds of the embodiments is described in detail in the following examples, but the artisan will recognize that the chemical reactions described may be readily adapted to prepare a number of other agents of the various embodiments. For example, the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds may be successfully performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g. by appropriately protecting interfering groups, by changing to other suitable reagents known in the art, or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions. A list of suitable protecting groups in organic synthesis can be found in T.W. Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1991 . Alternatively, other reactions disclosed herein or known in the art will be recognized as having applicability for preparing other compounds of the various embodiments. Reagents useful for synthesizing compounds may be obtained or prepared according to techniques known in the art.
The symbols, abbreviations and conventions in the processes, schemes, and examples are consistent with those used in the contemporary scientific literature. Specifically but not meant as limiting, the following abbreviations may be used in the examples and throughout the specification.
Ac (acetyl)
BOP (N-(benzenesulfonyl)-L-O-(l -pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine)
· Cbz (carboxybenzyl)
CDCI3 (deuterated chloroform)
CHCI3 (chloroform)
CuAAC (copper(l)-catalyzed azide alkyne cycloaddition)
DCC (N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide)
· DCM (dichloromethane)
DIAD (diisopropyl azodicarboxylate)
DIPEA (diisopropyl ethyl amine)
DMF (N, N-dimethylformamide)
DMSO (dimethylsulfoxide)
· EtOAc (ethyl acetate)
EtOH (ethanol)
FTIR (Fourier transform infrared)
g (grams)
h (hours)
· HATU (O-(7-aza-1 H-benzotriazol-1 -yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexa- fluorophosphate)
HBTU (O-(benzotriazol-1 -yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyl uronium hexafluoro- phosphate)
HCI (hydrochloric acid) HPLC (high pressure/high performance liquid chromatography) HRMS (high resolution mass spectrometry)
Hz (Hertz)
K2C03 (potassium carbonate)
L (litres)
MeOH (methanol)
mg (milligrams)
MHz (megahertz)
min (minutes)
ml_ (millilitres)
mM (millimolar)
mol (moles)
Ms (mesylate)
Na2S04 (sodium sulfate)
NHS (A/-hydroxysuccinimide)
NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance)
PEG (polyethylene glycol)
pet. spirits (petroleum spirits)
ppm (parts per million)
psi (pounds per square inch)
SN2 (substitution - nucleophilic, bimolecular)
TBTA (tris[(1 -benzyl-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazol-4-yl)methyl]amine)
TEA (triethylamine)
TFA (trifluoroacetic acid)
Tf (triflate)
THF (tetrahydrofuran)
TLC (thin layer chromatography)
UV (ultraviolet)
RM (reaction mixture)
Rt (retention time)
rt (room temperature)
Unless otherwise indicated, all temperatures are expressed in (degree centigrade). All reactions conducted at room temperature unless otherwise mentioned. All starting materials, reagents, and solvents were obtained from commercial sources and used without further purification unless otherwise stated. /V-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)- L-prolyl-L-0-(fe t-butylether)tyrosine methyl ester 26 was obtained from Genscript. All anhydrous reactions were performed under a dry nitrogen atmosphere. Diethyl ether, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and toluene were dried by passage through two sequential columns of activated neutral alumina on the Solvent Dispensing System built by J. C. Meyer and based on an original design by Grubbs and co-workers. Petroleum spirits refers to the fraction boiling at 40-60 °C. Thin layer chromatography (TLC) was performed on Merck pre-coated 0.25 mm silica aluminium-backed plates and visualised with UV light and/or dipping in ninhydrin solution or phosphomolybdic acid solution followed by heating. Purification of reaction products was carried out by flash chromatography using Merck Silica Gel 60 (230-400 mesh) or reverse phase C18 silica gel. Melting points were recorded on a Reichert-Jung Thermovar hot-stage microscope melting point apparatus. Optical rotations were recorded on a Perkin Elmer Model 341 polarimeter. FTIR spectra were obtained using a ThermoNicolet 6700 spectrometer using a SmartATR (attenuated total reflectance) attachment fitted with a diamond window. Proton (1H) and carbon (13C) NMR spectra were recorded on a BrukerAV400 spectrometer at 400 and 100 MHz, respectively. 1 H NMR are reported in ppm using a solvent as an internal standard (CDCIs at 7.26 ppm). Proton-decoupled 13C NMR (100 MHz) are reported in ppm using a solvent as an internal standard (CDCI3 at 77.16 ppm). High resolution mass spectrometry was acquired on either a WATERS QTOF II (CMSE, Clayton, VIC 3168) or a Finnigan hybrid LTQ-FT mass spectrometer (Thermo Electron Corp., Bio21 Institute, University of Melbourne, Parkville, VIC 3010) employing Electrospray lonisation (ESI).
Example 1A - Preparation of W-(Benzenesulfonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1- pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine (BOP) Synthesis of BOP began from the dipeptide 26, as shown in the following Scheme 1 :
Figure imgf000069_0001
Deprotection of the terf-butyl protecting group of 26 using trifluoroacetic acid at 0Ό provided phenol 27, which was used in the next step, after aqueous work-up, without further purification. Reaction of phenol 27 with 1 -pyrrolidinecarbonyl chloride proceeded smoothly in the presence of potassium carbonate to provide carbamate 28 in good yield (74%) over two steps. Hydrogenolysis of the Cbz protecting group was complete within 3 hours, and the resulting amine was obtained in excellent yield (85%) after flash chromatography. Amine 29 was then reacted with benzenesulfonyl chloride in the presence of base to give the sulfonamide 30 in excellent yield (96%) after flash chromatography. Finally, the methyl ester moiety of 30 was saponified using sodium hydroxide, followed by ion-exchange on Amberlyst resin, to provide BOP in 81 % yield after flash chromatography.
By way of exemplification we provide actual reaction conditions for the formation of BOP, starting from dipeptide 26.
Step 1: N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-tyrosine methyl ester (27)
TFA (1 .27 ml_, 16.6 mmol) was added dropwise to a suspension of N- (benzyloxycarbonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(tert-butylether)tyrosine methyl ester 26 (0.80 g, 1 .66 mmol; custom peptide synthesis from Genscript) in dry CH2CI2 (10 ml_) at 0 Ό. The mixture was slowly warmed to rt and stirred for 3 h at which point TLC (70:30 EtOAc/pet. spirits) indicated complete consumption of starting material. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with H2O, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was concentrated with toluene (*3) to give the crude /V-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-tyrosine methyl ester 27 (700 mg) as a colourless oil, which was used in the next step without further purification. Step 2: N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (28)
1 -Pyrrolidinecarbonyl chloride (147 μΙ_, 1 .38 mmol) was added to a mixture of the crude phenol 27 (393 mg, 0.922 mmol) and K2C03 (256 mg, 1 .84 mmol) in DMF (5 ml_). The mixture was stirred at 50 overnight, dil uted with EtOAc/H20 and the organic phase separated. The organic layer was washed with 5% HCI, sat. aq. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (70% EtOAc/pet. spirits) to give the carbamate 28 (355 mg, 74%) as a colourless foam, which was used in the next step without further purification.
Step 3: L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (29)
A mixture of the Cbz protected dipeptide 28 (356 mg, 0.681 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (50% H20, 150 mg) in MeOH (30 ml_) was purged three times with H2. The mixture was stirred under a H2 atmosphere for 3 h at which point TLC (10% MeOH/CH2CI2) indicated complete consumption of starting material. The mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (5% to 10% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give the amine 29 (224 mg, 85%) as a colourless oil. δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .64-1 .78 (2 H, m), 1 .82- 1 .92 (5 H, m), 2.16-2.25 (1 H, m), 2.97-3.15 (4 H, m), 3.39 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.49 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.65 (3 H, s), 4.03 (1 H, dd, J = 5.7, 8.3 Hz) 4.72 (1 H, dd, J = 7.8, 13.3 Hz), 5.69 (1 H, br s), 6.99 (2 H, d, J = 8.3 Hz), 7.13 (2 H, d, J = 8.3 Hz), 8.41 (1
H, d, J = 7.9 Hz).
Step 4: N-(Benzenesulfonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine methyl ester (30)
DIPEA (95 μΙ_, 0.546 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the amine D (71 mg, 0.182 mmol), PhS02CI (35 μΙ_, 0.273 mmol) and DMAP (2.2 mg, 0.018 mmol) in CH2CI2 (3 ml_). The mixture was stirred for 4 h at rt, concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue purified by flash chromatography (2.5% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give the product E (93 mg, 96%) as a colourless foam. δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .42-
I .56 (3 H, m), 1 .90-2.05 (5 H, m), 3.03 (1 H, dd, J = 7.6, 14.0 Hz), 3.10-3.16 (1 H, m), 3.26 (1 H, dd, J = 5.6, 14.0 Hz), 3.35-3.40 (1 H, m), 3.45 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.54 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.77 (3 H, s), 4.08 (1 H, dd, J = 2.0, 8.0 Hz), 4.82 (1 H, dt, J = 5.7, 1 1 .6 Hz), 7.06 (2 H, d, J = 8.7 Hz), 7.13 (2 H, d, J = 8.7 Hz), 7.25 (1 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz; obscured by solvent peak), 7.52-7.57 (2 H, m), 7.61 -7.65 (1 H, m), 7.83-7.85 (2 H, m). Step 5: N-(Benzenesulfonyl)-L-prolyl-L-0-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine (BOP)
0.1 M NaOH (3.2 ml_, 0.162 mmol) was added to a solution of the ester 30 (86 mg, 0.162 mmol) in MeOH (10 ml_) and the mixture stirred overnight at rt. The reaction was quenched with Amberlyst resin (H+ form), filtered and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (10% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give the product BOP (68 mg, 81 %) as a colourless glass. δΗ (400 MHz, d4-MeOH) 1 .47-1 .55 (1 H, m), 1 .59-1 .72 (2 H, m), 1 .77-1 .85 (1 H, m), 1 .93- 2.00 (4 H, m), 3.1 1 (1 H, dd, J = 7.8, 13.7 Hz), 3.18-3.24 (1 H, m), 3.27 (1 H, dd, J = 5.0, 13.7 Hz), 3.35-3.44 (3 H, m), 3.56 (2 H, d, J = 6.5 Hz), 4.14 (1 H, dd, J = 4.0, 8.5 Hz), 4.69 (1 H, m), 7.04 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.27 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.60 (2 H, t, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.69 (1 H, t, J = 7.4 Hz), 7.86 (2H, d, J = 7.4 Hz).
For in vitro and in vivo experiments, BOP was converted to the sodium salt by treatment of a solution of the free acid of BOP in MeOH with 0.98 equivalents of NaOH (0.01 M NaOH). The solution was filtered through a 0.45 μηι syringe filter unit and the product lyophilised to give the sodium salt as a fluffy colourless powder. 5H (400 MHz, D2O) 1 .47-1 .59 (2 H, m), 1 .68-1 .83 (2 H, m), 1 .87-1 .92 (4 H, m), 3.01 (1 H, dd, J = 7.7, 13.8 Hz), 3.18-3.26 (2 H, m), 3.34-3.40 (3 H, m), 3.48-3.51 (2 H, m), 4.06 (1 H, dd, J = 4.4, 8.7 Hz), 4.43 (1 H, dd, J = 5.0, 7.7 Hz), 7.04 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.27 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.61 (2 H, t, J = 8.1 Hz), 7.73 (1 H, t, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.78 (2 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz).
Example 1 B - Preparation of Fluorescent labelled Integrin antagonist with PEG Spacer (Compound 22)
Figure imgf000072_0001
Scheme 2
The general strategy for the fluorescent labelling of BOP was based on an efficient strategy for installing a frans-configured bifunctional PEG linker at the C4-position of BOP for subsequent conjugation to a fluorescent tag. Lactone 4 has previously been reported as a versatile synthon for accessing 4-c/s- hydroxy proline based dipetides through direct acylation with protected amino acids. Subsequent activation of the 4-c/s-hydroxy group followed by SN2 displacement with nucleophiles would then provide the desired 4-frans-configured proline derivatives. Thus, we envisaged a variety of C4-functionalised derivatives of BOP could be acquired starting from lactone 4 and tyrosine derivative 7 (Scheme 2). Lactone 4 was readily prepared by treatment of A/-phenylsulfonyl-frans-4-hydroxy-L-proline under Mitsunobu conditions employing DIAD and PP i3. The tyrosine derivative 7 was synthesised from protected 5 by treatment with pyrrolidine carbonyl chloride in the presence of K2CO3 to give intermediate 6, followed by removal of the Cbz protecting group. Exposure of lactone 4 to tyrosine derivative 7 under biphasic conditions afforded the dipeptide 8 in 89% yield as a single diastereoisomer. This method takes advantage of the activated nature of the bicyclic lactone and allows clean conversion to the 4-c/s-hydroxy proline dipeptides without resorting to dehydrative peptide coupling. Initial attempts in installing the PEG linker focused on the direct displacement of c/s-configured triflate 9 with the amino PEG derivative 10, which could be readily obtained from commercially accessible 4,7,10-trioxa-1 ,13- tridecanediamine. SN2 displacement of 4-c/s-triflates with amines has been reported to give the corresponding frans-amino proline derivatives, which would be attractive in the current context given the low steric bulk of the resultant linkage. Accordingly, the hydroxyl group of compound 8 was converted to the corresponding triflate 9 prior to treatment with the PEG derivative 10, which gave the PEGylated product 1 1 , albeit in disappointing yields (27% over 2 steps) (Scheme 2). Although no major side products were isolated during the formation of either the triflate 9, or the PEG derivative 10, a possible rationalisation for the poor yields of the /V-alkylation reaction was intermediate formation of the trifluoromethanesulfonyl imidate. Therefore, the simplified c/s-hydroxy compound 12, which lacks a secondary amide was also investigated.
The introduction of /V-linked aromatic heterocycles (e.g. imidazoles, triazoles, tetrazoles and benzimidazoles) at the 4-position of the proline residue has previously been described. Based on this observation, we anticipated that attachment of a PEG linker via a triazole might also be tolerated for α9β1 integrin binding. Consequently, this would allow installation of the PEG linker using the Cu(l)-catalyzed azide alkyne cycloaddition (CuAAC) reaction between an alkyne functionalised PEG derivative 15 and a frans-azido integrin antagonist 18, as shown in the following Scheme 3:
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0002
Scheme 3
The alkyne functionalised PEG derivative 15 was obtained in one step from 10 by condensation with propionic acid under DCC coupling conditions (Scheme 2a). The synthesis of frans-azido functionalised dipeptide 18 was readily achieved from lactone 4 (Scheme 2b). Treatment of 4 with Na2C03 in MeOH afforded the c/s-hydroxy proline ester 12 in 80% yield. The c/s-alcohol of 12 was converted to the corresponding mesylate, which was subsequently displaced with sodium azide to give the trans- azido proline ester 16 in 88% yield over 2 steps. Hydrolysis of the methyl ester of 16 gave the proline acid 17, which was then reacted with the tyrosine derivative 7 under standard HBTU coupling conditions to furnish the dipeptide 18 in 93% yield. Alternatively, dipeptide 18 is also accessible from the c/s-alcohol 8 (from Scheme 1 ). Conveniently, mesylation and subsequent azide displacement of alcohol 8 proceeded smoothly to furnish product 18, which was obtained without the necessity for chromatographic purification.
With the PEG alkyne 15 and azide 18 in hand, attention turned to their coupling using the CuAAC reaction, as shown in the following Scheme 4:
Figure imgf000075_0001
Scheme 4
Satisfyingly, treatment of 15 and 18 with CuS04, sodium ascorbate and the Cu(l)- stabilising ligand tris[(1 -benzyl-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazol-4-yl)methyl]amine (TBTA) gave the 1 ,4-disubstituted triazole 19 in virtually quantitative yield. Hydrolysis of methyl ester 19 gave the acid 20 and following removal of the Cbz group by hydrogenolysis, the fully deprotected PEG-functionalised integrin antagonist 21 was obtained in good yields (87% over 2 steps). Finally, treatment of amine 21 with NHS-rhodamine under aqueous conditions gave the fluorescent labelled integrin antagonist 22 in 38% yield as a 5:1 mixture of 5- and 6-carboxytetramethylrhodamine regioisomers after purification by C18 reversed phase chromatography.
By way of exemplification we provide actual reaction conditions for the formation of fluorescently labelled BOP derivative 22, starting from /V-phenylsulfonyl-frans-4- hydroxy-L-proline.
Step 1: (1S,4S)-5-(Phenylsulfonyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2. 1]heptan-3-one (4)
Diisopropylazocarboxylate (1 .87 ml_, 9.48 mmol) was added dropwise over 20 min to a stirred suspension of A/-phenylsulfonyl-frans-4-hydroxy-L-proline (2.45 g, 9.03 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (2.49 g, 9.48 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (150 ml_) at 0 °C under N2. The reaction was warmed to rt and stirred overnight, concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue purified by flash chromatography (50:50 EtOAc/pet. spirits) to give the lactone 4 (1 .77 g, 78%) as a colourless solid. Spectroscopic data is identical to previously reported values. Step 2: (S)-4-(2-(((Benzyloxy)carbonyl)amino)-3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (6)
1 -Pyrrolidinecarbonyl chloride (336 μΙ_, 3.04 mmol) was added to a Biotage™ microwave vial containing a mixture of the tyrosine 5 (500 mg, 1 .52 mmol) and K2CO3 (420 mg, 3.04 mmol) in CH3CN (9 mL). The mixture was heated to 100Ό in a microwave reactor for 45 min, diluted with H2O and then stirred for 30 min. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2 20 mL) and the combined organic phases washed with sat. aq. NaHC03, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was recrystallised (EtOAc/pet. spirits) to give the carbamate 6 (484 mg, 75%) as colourless crystals, mp 1 16-1 17 °C; [a]D +42.5 (c 0.81 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .94 (4 H, m, (CH2)2), 3.09 (2 H, m), 3.47 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.55 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.71 (3 H, s), 4.64 (1 H, m), 5.10 (2 H, s), 5.22 (1 H, d, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.03-7.38 (9 H, m); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.0, 25.8, 37.5, 46.3, 46.4, 52.3, 54.8, 67.00, 121.9 (2 C), 128.1 (2 C), 128.1 , 128.5 (2 C), 130.0 (2 C) , 132.4, 136.2, 150.6, 153.0, 155.6, 171.9; v/cm-1 3331 , 2954, 1719, 1698; 1511 , 1402, 1345, 1216, 1061 , 1020, 866, 754, 699; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 449.1686 (C23H26N2Na06 [M+Na]+ requires 449.1689).
Step 3: (S)-4-(2-Amino-3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (7) A mixture of protected tyrosine 6 (950 mg, 1 .13 mmol) and Pd/C (10%, 50 mg) in MeOH (40 mL) was purged three times with H2. The mixture was stirred under a H2 atmosphere for 2 h at which point TLC indicated complete consumption of starting material. The mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite and the filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude amine 7 (637 mg, 98%) as a colourless oil, which set solid upon standing. A small portion was further purified by flash chromatography (5:95 to 10:90 MeOH/CH2CI2) for characterisation, [a]D -1 1.6 (c 1 .09 in MeOH); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .97 (4 H, m), 2.91 (1 H, dd, J = 7.1 , 13.6 Hz), 3.02 (1 H, dd, J = 6.1 , 13.6 Hz), 3.42 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.43 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.68 (3 H, s), 4.84 (2 H, br s), 3.70 (1 H, dd, J = 6.2, 7.1 Hz), 7.05 (2 H, m), 7.21 (2 H, m); 5c (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.9, 26.7, 41.1 , 47.5, 47.5, 52.4, 56.7, 123.0 (2 C), 131.2 (2 C), 135.6, 151 .6, 155.1 , 176.1 ; v/cm"1 3311 , 2954, 2878, 1714, 1510, 1399, 1344, 1214, 1 168, 1086, 1062, 1020, 864, 755; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 293.1497 (Ci5H20N2O4SH [M+H]+ requires 293.1496). Step 4: 4-((S)-2-((2S S)-4-Hydroxy-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxam methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (8)
The lactone 4 (466 mg, 1 .84 mmol) and the amine 7 (510 mg, 1 .76 mmol) in toluene/H20 (5:1 , 6 ml_) was stirred at 80Ό for 2 d and then diluted with EtOAc and washed with 1 M HCI, sat. aq. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (100% EtOAc to 5% MeOH/EtOAc) to give the alcohol 8 (851 mg, 89%) as a colourless foam, [a]D -31 .4 (c 1 .66 in MeOH); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .57 (1 H, m), 1 .89-2.00 (5 H, m), 2.94 (1 H, dd, J = 9.5, 14.0 Hz), 3.13 (1 H, dd, J = 4.0, 10.5 Hz), 3.23 (1 H, d, J = 10.5 Hz), 3.35 (1 H, dd, J = 5.0, 14.0 Hz), 3.40 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.51 -3.56 (3 H, m), 3.78 (3 H, s), 4.03 (1 H, m), 4.12 (1 H, d, J = 9.0 Hz), 4.75 (1 H, m), 6.99 (2 H, d, J = 8.3 Hz), 7.07 (1 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.19 (2 H, 8.3 Hz), 7.51 -7.63 (3 H, m), 7.83 (2 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz); 5c (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.1 , 25.9, 37.0, 37.6, 46.5, 46.6, 52.6, 53.3, 57.8, 61 .7, 69.7, 122.5 (2 C), 127.9 (2 C), 129.4 (2 C), 130.5 (2 C), 133.4, 133.8, 136.3, 150.2, 154.1 , 171 .6, 171 .7; v/cm"1 3408, 1743, 1718, 1701 , 1663; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 568.1723 (C26H3i NaN3O8S [M+Na]+ requires 568.1730).
Step 5: 4-((R)-3-Methoxy-3-oxo-2-((2S,4R)-4-((3-oxo-1-phenyl-2,8, 11, 14-tetraoxa-4- azaheptadecan- 17-yl)amino)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)propyl) phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (11)
Alcohol 8 (105 mg, 0.19 mmol) was dissolved in dry CH2CI2 (2 ml_) under N2 at -20Ό. DIPEA (99 μΙ_, 0.57 mmol) was added followed by Tf2O (50 μΙ_, 0.57 mmol) dropwise over 30 min. The reaction was stirred for 2 h at -20Ό and then quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3, diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase separated. The organic phase was washed with H2O, 2% citric acid, sat. aq. NaHCO3 and brine. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (2 times) and the combined organic phases dried (MgSO4) and the residue concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude triflate 9. To this residue was added the PEG amine 10 (141 mg, 0.39 mmol) in dry THF (200 μΙ_) and the reaction stirred overnight at rt. The mixture was diluted with 10% butan-2- ol/EtOAc (20 ml_) and the organic phase washed with sat. aq. NaHCO3, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (2% to 3% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give 11 (46 mg, 27% over 2 steps) as a colourless oil. A small portion was further purified by C18-silica gel chromatography (40% H2O/MeCN) for characterisation, δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .40 (1 H, m), 1 .55 (2H, m), 1 .77 (2H, m), 1 .93 (4H, m), 2.12 (1 H, m), 2.43 (2H, m), 2.82 (1 H, dd, J = 7.8, 9.2 Hz), 2.94 (1 H, m), 3.02 (1 H, dd, J = 7.8, 14.0 Hz), 3.23-3.32 (4 H, m), 3.38 (2H, t, J = 6.1 Hz), 3.44 (2H, t, J = 6.6 Hz), 3.46 - 3.60 (14H, m), 3.76 (3H, s), 4.09 (1 H, dd, J = 3.0, 8.9 Hz), 4.85 (1 H, td, J = 5.7, 7.8 Hz), 5.07 (2H, s), 5.42 (1 H, brs), 7.05 (2H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 7.14 (2H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 7.21 (1 H, d, J = 7.8 Hz), 7.28-7.35 (5H, br m), 7.53 (2H, t, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.60 (1 H, br t, J = 7.04), 7.81 (1 H, br d, J = 7.05 Hz); 5c (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.1 , 25.9, 29.6, 30.1 , 36.5, 37.5, 39.4, 45.9, 46.5, 46.6, 52.6, 53.3, 54.7, 56.5, 61 .6, 66.6, 69.8, 69.7, 70.3, 70.3, 70.67, 70.72, 122.0 (2 C), 128.1 (2 C), 128.2 (2 C), 128.6 (3 C), 129.4 (2 C), 130.2 (2 C), 133.0, 133.5, 136.0, 137.0, 150.7, 153.2, 156.6, 170.9, 171 .6; v/cm"1 3334, 2877, 2341 , 1706, 1521 . HRMS (ESI+) m/z 904.3770 (C44H59NaN5Oi2S [M+Na]+ requires 904.3779).
Step 6: Methyl (2S,4S)-4-hydroxy-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (12) A mixture of lactone 4 (1 .74 g, 6.88 mmol) and Na2C03 (3.65 g, 34.4 mmol) was stirred in MeOH (50 ml_) at rt overnight. The residue was concentrated, taken up in EtOAc (100 ml_), and H20 and the organic phase separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (2 χ 30 ml_) and the combined organic phases washed with brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the methyl ester 12 (1 .57 g, 80%) as a colourless solid. Spectroscopic data is consistent with reported values and the material was used without further purification.
Step 7: Methyl (2S,4R)-4-azido-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (16)
MsCI (304 μΙ_, 3.93 mmol) was added to a mixture of the alcohol 12 (934 mg, 3.27 mmol) and triethylamine (620 μΙ_, 4.48 mmol) in dry CH2CI2 (20 ml_) at 0 °C under N2. The mixture was stirred for 2 h, diluted with CH2CI2 and washed sequentially with 5% HCI, sat. aq. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude mesylate as a pale yellow oil. This residue was taken up in DMSO (13 ml) and treated with NaN3 (638 mg, 9.81 mmol) and the mixture stirred overnight at 80 °C. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc and washed with H2O, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. The residue was purified by recrystallisation (MeOH) to give 16 (874 mg, 86% over 2 steps) as colourless needles, mp 98-100°C, [a]D -33.4 (c 1 .02 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 2.17-2.21 (2 H, m), 3.43 (1 H, ddd, J = 0.7, 3.0, 1 1 .0 Hz), 3.71 (1 H, dd, J = 5.0, 1 1 .0 Hz), 3.76 (3 H, s), 4.18-4.22 (1 H, m), 4.30 (1 H, t, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.53-7.58 (2 H, m), 7.61 -7.65 (1 H, m), 7.87-7.89 (2 H, m); 5c (100 MHz, CDCI3) 36.5, 52.9, 53.2, 59.45, 59.51 , 127.6 (2 C), 129.3 (2 C), 133.3, 137.6, 171 .9; v/cm"1 2101 , 1747, 1445, 1345, 1207, 1 158, 1095, 1017, 758, 722, 696; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 31 1 .0808 (C12H14N4O4SH [M+H]+ requires 31 1 .0809); m/z 328.1073 (Ci2H14N404SNH4 [M+NH4]+ requires 328.1074.
Step 8: (2S,4R)-4-azido-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (17)
The methyl ester 16 (586 mg, 1 .89 mmol) in 3:1 EtOH/THF (40 mL) was treated with 0.2 M NaOH (12.3 mL, 2.45 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 3 h at rt and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was diluted with diethyl ether and the aqueous phase separated. The organic layer was extracted with 0.2 M NaOH (2 x 10 mL) and the combined aqueous extract was acidified with 10% HCI. The aqueous layer was extracted with CHCI3 (4 χ 30 mL) and the combined organic phases washed with brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2 with 0.5% AcOH) to give acid 17 (492 mg, 88%) as a colourless oil, [a]D -34.4 (c 0.82 in MeOH); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 2.18-2.32 (2 H, m), 3.40 (1 H, m), 3.73 (1 H, dd, J = 4.8, 1 1 .5 Hz, H5'), 4.22 (1 H, m, H4), 4.29 (1 H, t, J = 1.1 Hz), 7.56 (2 H, m), 7.64 (1 H, m), 7.88 (2 H, m), 10.72 (1 H, br s); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 36.1 , 53.4, 59.5, 127.6 (2 C), 129.4 (2 C), 133.6, 136.9, 176.6; v/cm"1 3500-2500, 2107, 1731 ; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 319.0472 (Ci i Hi2N4NaO4S [M+Na]+ requires 319.0472).
Step 9: 4-((S)-2-((2S R)-4-azido-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbox methoxy-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (18)
0-(Benzotriazol-1 -yl)-/V,/V,/\/',/\/'-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU) (693 mg, 1 .83 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of acid 17 (491 mg, 1 .66 mmol) and A/,/V-diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) (578 μί, 3.32 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) at 0 °C and stirred for 10 min under N2. Amine 7 (484 mg, 1 .66 mmol) in DMF (6 mL) was then added dropwise and the combined mixture warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed sequentially with 5% HCI, sat. aq. NaHCO3, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (3% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the dipeptide 7 (928 mg, 98%) as a pale yellow foam, [a]D -4.6 (c 0.85 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .67 (1 H, m), 1 .86-1 .98 (4 H, m), 2.04 (1 H, dt, J = 5.5, 13.2 Hz), 2.99 (1 H, dd, J = 8.5, 14.0 Hz), 3.19 (1 H, dd, J = 4.5, 10.9 Hz), 3.30 (1 H, dd, J = 5.5 14.0 Hz), 3.44 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.48 (1 H, dd, J = 5.5, 1 1 .5 Hz), 3.53 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.78 (3 H, s), 3.82 (1 H, m), 4.09 (1 H, dd, J = 5.5, 8.4 Hz), 4.87 (1 H, dt, J = 8.3, 8.3, 5.5 Hz), 7.05, 7.15 (4 H, 2 d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.19 (1 H, d, J = 8.2 Hz), 7.53-7.57 (2 H, m), 7.62-7.66 (1 H, m), 7.83-7.86 (2 H, m); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.1 , 25.9, 35.6, 37.5, 46.4, 46.6, 52.7, 53.1 , 53.8, 58.9, 61 .1 , 122.1 (2 C), 128.0 (2 C), 129.5 (2 C), 130.2 (2 C), 132.9, 133.7, 136.0, 150.7, 153.1 , 169.9, 171 .5; v/cm-1 3316, 2975, 2880, 2105, 1716, 1682; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 593.1789 (C26H3oN6Na07S [M+Na]+ requires 593.1789). Synthesis of 18 via alcohol 8
Methanesulfonyl chloride (92 μΙ_, 1 .18 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of the alcohol 8 (251 mg, 0.394 mmol) and triethylamine (170 μΙ_, 1 .22 mmol) in dry CH2CI2 at 0 Ό under N 2. The reaction was stirred for 1 h at 0 and then warmed to rt and stirred for a further 1 h. The reaction was diluted with CH2CI2 and washed sequentially with 5% HCI, sat. aq. NaHC03 and brine. The organic phase was dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the intermediate mesylate (4-((S)-3- methoxy-2-((2S,4S)-4-((methylsulfonyl)oxy)-1 -(phenylsulfonyl) pyrrolidine-2- carboxamido)-3-oxopropyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate) (270 mg, quant) as a colourless foam, which was used without further purification, [O]D -13.5 (c 1 .0 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .81 (1 H, m), 1 .89-1.96 (4 H, m), 2.63 (1 H, br d), 2.82 (3 H, s), 3.06-3.18 (2 H, m), 3.44 (2 H, t, J = 6.4 Hz), 3.50-3.55 (3 H, m), 3.68 (1 H, dt, J = 1 .3, 12.5 Hz), 3.71 (3 H, s), 4.63 (1 H, dd, J = 2.0, 10.1 Hz), 4.73 (1 H, dd, J = 6.7, 13.4 Hz), 5.02 (1 H, tt, J = 1 .4, 4.7 Hz), 7.07 (2 H, d, J = 8.6), 7.16 (2 H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 7.39 (1 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.56 (2 H, t, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.64-7.68 (1 H, m), 7.81 -7.84 (2 H, m); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.1 , 25.9, 35.5, 37.4, 38.9, 46.5, 46.5, 52.5, 54.0, 55.4, 61 .0, 78.0, 122.1 (2 C), 128.0 (2 C), 129.8 (2 C), 130.1 (2 C), 132.8, 134.1 , 135.4, 150.7, 153.1 , 169.8, 171 .3; v/cm"1 3409, 2954, 2880, 1715, 1678, 151 1 ; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 646.1497 (C27H33NaN3OioS2 [M+Na]+ requires 646.1505). The above mesylate (97 mg, 0.16 mmol) was taken up in DMSO (1 .5 ml_) and treated with NaN3 (30.4 mg, 0.47 mmol) and the mixture stirred overnight at 80 °C. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc and washed with H20, brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated to give azide 18 (82 mg, 92%). Spectroscopic data were consistent with those reported above for compound 18. Step 10: 4-((R)-3-methoxy-3-oxo-2-((2S,4R)-4-(4-((3-oxo-1-phenyl-2,8, 11, 14-tetraoxa- 4-azaheptadecan-1 '-yl) carbamoyl) -1H- 1, 2, 3-triazol-1-yl)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)
pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)propyl)phenyl pyrrolidine-1 -carboxylate (19)
Sodium ascorbate (4.4 mg, 22.2 μιηοΙ), CuS04 (224 μΙ_, 2.24 μιηοΙ, 0.01 M in H20) and TBTA (281 μΙ_, 2.81 μηποΙ, 0.01 M in THF) were added sequentially to a mixture of the azide 18 (32 mg, 56.1 μιηοΙ) and the alkyne 15 (25 mg, 61 .8 μιηοΙ) in DMF (1 mL). The reaction was stirred at 60 Ό for 2 h and then diluted with EtOAc (20 mL). The organic phase was washed with sat. aq. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (21 :2:1 :1 EtOAc/acetone/MeOH/H20) to give the triazole product 19 (54 mg, 99%) as a colourless oil, [a]D +10.7 (c 1 .0 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .72-1 .94 (8 H, m), 2.14 (1 H, dt, J = 12.8, 13.9 Hz), 2.54 (1 H, ddd, J = 2.3, 6.5, 12.9 Hz), 2.92 (1 H, dd, J = 10.0, 13.9 Hz), 3.29 (2 H, dd, J = 6.0, 12.3 Hz), 3.38 (1 H, dd, J = 4.8 Hz, 13.9 Hz), 3.41 -3.63 (19 H, m), 3.80 (3 H, s), 3.83 (1 H, m), 4.29 (1 H, dd, J = 2.0, 8.7 Hz), 4.65 (1 H, m), 4.94 (1 H, dt, J = 4.9, 9.8 Hz), 5.06 (2 H, br s), 5.44 (1 H, br t, J = 5.7 Hz), 7.04 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.23 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.28-7.33 (5 H, m), 7.38-7.43 (2 H, m), 7.52 (2 H, t, J = 1.1 Hz), 7.62 (1 H, t, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.79 (2 H, d, J = 7.3 Hz), 8.18 (1 H, s); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.1 , 25.9, 29.4, 29.5, 33.7, 37.2, 37.9, 39.4, 46.4, 46.6, 52.7, 53.2, 53.6, 57.9, 60.7, 66.5, 69.7, 69.7, 70.3, 70.5, 70.6, 70.7, 122.2 (2 C), 126.1 , 127.7 (2 C), 128.1 , 128.2, 128.5 (3 C), 129.7 (2 C), 130.3 (2 C), 133.1 , 133.9, 135.5, 136.9, 143.2, 150.6, 153.3, 156.6, 159.8, 169.0, 171 .5; v/cm"1 3331 , 2951 , 2875, 1714, 1667, 1575, 1512; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 999.3891 (C47H6oNaN8Oi3S [M+Na]+ requires 999.3893).
Step 11: (R)-2-((2SAR)-4-(4-((3-(2-(2-(3-aminopropoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)propyl) carbamoyl) -1H- 1, 2, 3-triazol-1-yl)-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)-3-(4- ((pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)oxy)phenyl)propanoic acid (21)
Aqueous NaOH (1 .13 mL, 0.225 mmol, 0.2 M) was added to a stirred mixture of methyl ester 19 (1 10 mg, 0.1 13 mmol) in EtOH/THF (2:1 , 3 mL) and stirred overnight at rt. The reaction was quenched with 1 M HCI, diluted with EtOAc and the organic phase separated. The aqueous phase was extracted twice with CHCI3 and the combined organic phases dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude acid 20 (100 mg). A mixture of the crude acid and 10% Pd/C (50 mg, 50% H20) in MeOH/H20 (5:1 , 12 mL) was stirred under a H2 atmosphere for 2 h at rt. The mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite, concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue purified using a C18 reversed phase cartridge (100% H20 to 50% MeOH/H20). The purified material was lyophilised to give the amine 21 (81.3 mg, 87% over 2 steps) as a colourless fluffy powder, [a]D -16.0 (c 0.49 in MeOH); δΗ (400 MHz, D20) 1 .81 (4 H, m), 1.91 (4 H, m), 2.38 (1 H, m), 2.98-3.09 (4 H, m), 3.21 - 3.30 (3 H, m), 3.30 (2 H, m), 3.45 (2 H, t, J = 6.8 Hz), 3.59-3.66 (12 H, m), 3.89 (1 H, d, J = 12.9 Hz), 4.04 (1 H, dd, J = 4.8, 12.9 Hz), 4.41 (1 H, t, J = 8.2 Hz), 4.53 (1 H, dd, J = 5.3, 7.4 Hz), 5.00 (1 H, br s), 6.99 (2 H, d, J = 8.5 Hz), 7.306-7.356 (4 H, m), 7.43-7.50 (3 H, m), 7.99 (1 H, s); 5C (100 MHz, D20 with acetone) 25.2, 25.8, 27.2,
29.1 , 35.5, 36.9, 37.2, 38.3, 47.1 , 47.1 , 49.5, 55.1 , 56.7, 60.4, 61 .7, 68.9, 69.3, 70.1 ,
70.2, 70.3, 122.6 (2 C), 125.8, 127.5 (2 C), 130.2 (2 C), 131 .2 (2 C), 134.5, 135.1 , 135.6, 142.9, 150.4, 155.6, 161.9, 173.2, 175.8; v/cm"1 3382, 3064, 2950, 2878, 1706, 1658, 151 1 ; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 829.3550 (C38H52N80iiS [M+H]+ requires 829.3549).
Step 12: 5(6)-Carboxytetramethyl rhodamine labelled compound (22)
A mixture of the amine 21 (9.5 mg, 1 1.3 μηποΙ) in 0.2 M NaHC03 (1 mL) was treated with 5(6)-carboxytetramethyl rhodamine /V-succinimidyl ester (NHS-rhodamine, Thermo Scientific) (8.9 mg, 16.9 μηποΙ) and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight at rt. The reaction was quenched with acetic acid, concentrated and the residue purified by reversed phase chromatography (50% MeOH/H20 to 100% MeOH) to give the rhodamine labelled compound 22 (5.3 mg, 38%) as a purple powder after lyophilisation. Compound 22 was isolated as a 5:1 mixture of regioisomers; 5H (400 MHz, d4-methanol) major isomer: 1 .80-1 .99 (9 H, m), 2.37 (1 H, dt, J = 6.6, 13.5 Hz), 2.70 (1 H, m), 3.08 (1 H, dd, J = 7.5, 13.9 Hz), 3.22-3.26 (1 H, m), 3.26 (6 H, s), 3.27 (6 H, s), 3.35 (2H, t, J = 6.3 Hz), 3.43 (2H, t, J = 6.3 Hz), 3.48-3.66 (17 H, m), 3.74 (1 H, dd, J = 3.7, 12.0 Hz), 3.91 (1 H, dd, J = 6.0, 12.0 Hz), 4.45 (1 H, t, J = 7.1 Hz), 4.61 (1 H, t, J = 5.6 Hz), 4.94 (1 H, m), 6.86 (2 H, br s), 6.95-6.99 (4 H, m), 7.16 (2 H, d, J = 9.5 Hz), 7.28 (2 H, d, J = 8.1 Hz), 7.35-7.42 (3 H, m), 7.51 (1 H, t, J = 7.3 Hz), 7.60- 7.63 (2 H, m), 8.06-8.08 (2 H, m), 8.56 (1 H, s); 5C (100 MHz, d4-methanol) major isomer: 25.9, 26.7, 30.4, 36.6, 38.0, 38.1 , 38.9, 40.9 (4 C), 47.47, 47.53, 55.9, 60.3,
62.3, 70.3, 70.5, 71 .35, 71 .4, 71 .6 (2 C), 97.3 (2 C), 1 14.8 (2 C), 1 15.2 (2 C), 122.7 (4 C), 126.3, 128.6 (2 C), 130.0, 130.1 , 130.5 (2 C), 131 .1 , 131 .7 (4 C), 132.5 (2 C), 134.4 (2 C), 136.0, 137.2, 137.3, 138.1 , 144.0, 151 .6, 155.1 , 158.7 (2 C), 159.0 (2 C), 161 .6, 162.0, 168.7, 172.6; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 1241 .4970 (C63H72N10O15SH [M+H]+ requires 1241 .4972).
Example 1C - Preparation of R-BC154 (Compound 25)
Compound 25 (R-BC154), which lacks the PEG-spacer was also synthesised, shown in the following Scheme 5:
Figure imgf000083_0001
Scheme 5
Thus, hydrolysis of the methyl ester 18 with NaOH gave the deprotected azide inhibitor 23, which was subsequently reacted with N-propynyl sulforhodamine B 24 in the presence of CuSO4, sodium ascorbate and TBTA to give the fluorescent labelled 25 (R-BC154) in 43% yield after purification by HPLC (Scheme 4).
By way of exemplification we provide actual reaction conditions for the formation of fluorescently labelled BOP derivative 25, starting from methyl ester 18.
Step 1: (S)-2-((2S R)-4-Azido-1-(phenylsulfonyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxam
((pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)oxy)phenyl)propanoic acid (23)
The methyl ester 18 (420 mg, 0.737 mmol) in EtOH (10 ml_) was treated with 0.2 M NaOH (4.05 ml_, 0.81 1 mmol) and stirred at rt for 1 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to remove EtOH and the aqueous phase acidified with 10% HCI. The aqueous phase was extracted with CHCI3 (4 x 10 ml_) and the combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (10% MeOH/CH2CI2 with 0.5% AcOH) to give acid 23 (384 mg, 94%) as a pale yellow foam, [a]D -0.7 (c 1 .00 in CHCI3); δΗ (400 MHz, CDCI3) 1 .67-1 .73 (1 H, m), 1 .89-1 .96 (5 H, m), 3.10 (1 H, dd, J = 8.0, 13.8 Hz), 3.21 (1 H, dd, J = 4.0, 1 1.5 Hz), 3.38 (1 H, dd, J = 5.3, 14.0 Hz), 3.44-3.55 (5 H, m), 3.81 (1 H, m), 4.1 1 (1 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 4.89 (1 H, m), 7.05, 7.22 (4 H, 2 d, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.41 (1 H, d, J = 6.8 Hz), 7.53-7.64 (3 H, m), 7.85 (2 H, d, J = 7.5 Hz); 5C (100 MHz, CDCI3) 25.0, 25.8, 36.1 , 36.8, 46.5, 46.6, 53.2, 53.9, 58.9, 61 .2, 122.0 (2 C), 128.0 (2 C), 129.4 (2 C), 130.5 (2 C), 133.6, 133.7, 136.0, 150.5, 153.6, 170.9, 173.7; v/cm"1 3329, 2977, 2881 , 2105, 1706, 1672; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 557.1817 (C25H29N706S [M+H]+ requires 557.1813).
Step 2: R-BC154 (25)
The azide 23 (12 mg, 22 μηποΙ) and /V-propynyl sulforhodamine B 24 (14 mg, 24 μηποΙ) in DMF (2 ml_) were treated with CuS04 (86 μΙ_, 0.86 μιηοΙ, 0.01 M in H20), sodium ascorbate (430 μΙ_, 4.3 μιηοΙ, 0.01 M in H20) and tris[{ 1 -benzyl- 1 H- 1 ,2, 3-triazol-4- yl)methyl]amine (TBTA) (108 μΙ_, 1.08 μηποΙ, 0.01 M in DMF). The mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 2 h at which point TLC indicated formation of a new fluorescent product. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue partly purified by flash chromatography (40:10:1 CHCI3/MeOH/H20 with 0.5% AcOH). This material was further purified by HPLC (50%-98% MeCN/H2O (0.1 % TFA) gradient over 15 minutes; Rt = 14.9 min) to give pure 25 (10.6 mg, 43%) as a purple glass, 5H (400 MHz, d4-methanol) 1 .27-1 .31 (12 H, dt, J = 7.0, 3.5 Hz), 1 .91 -1 .98 (4 H, m), 2.29-2.35 (1 H, m), 2.71 -2.78 (1 H, m), 3.08 (1 H, dd, J = 7.5, 13.8 Hz), 3.22 (1 H, dd, J = 5.3, 13.8 Hz), 3.41 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.54 (2 H, t, J = 6.5 Hz), 3.63-3.70 (8 H, m), 3.85 (1 H, dd, J = 3.5, 12.0 Hz), 3.97 (1 H, dd, J = 5.6, 11 .6 Hz), 4.21 (2 H, d, J = 1 .4 Hz), 4.41 (1 H, t, J = 7.3 Hz), 4.72 (1 H, dd, J = 5.4, 7.5 Hz), 5.08 (1 H, m), 6.91 (2 H, t, J = 2.2 Hz), 6.98-7.04 (4 H, m), 7.1 1 (2 H, t, J = 9.0 Hz), 7.30 (2 H, d, J = 8.6 Hz), 7.40 (1 H, d, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.44 (2 H, t, J = 7.5 Hz), 7.58-7.68 (4 H, m), 8.00 (1 H, dd, J = 1 .9, 8.0 Hz), 8.37 (1 H, d, J = 1 .8 Hz); 5C (100 MHz, d4-methanol) 12.9 (4 C), 25.9, 26.7, 37.1 , 37.6, 39.0, 46.8 (4 C), 47.5, 47.6, 54.8, 55.7, 60.3, 62.1 , 97.0 (2 C), 1 15.0 (2 C), 1 15.26, 1 15.29, 122.9 (2 C), 123.9, 127.5, 128.6 (2 C), 129.3, 130.5 (2 C), 131 .6 (2 C), 132.3, 133.8, 133.9, 134.4, 135.26, 135.34, 138.3, 144.1 , 144.8, 146.9, 151 .7, 155.2, 157.16, 157.17, 157.2, 157.8, 159.4, 173.1 , 173.8; v/cm-1 3088-3418, 2977, 2876, 171 1 , 1649, 1588; HRMS (ESI+) m/z 1 174.3447 (C55H6iN9NaOi3S3 [M+Na]+ requires 1 174.3443). For in vitro and in vivo testing, the free acid of 25 (1 1 .7 mg, 9.97 μηιοΙ) was dissolved in 0.01 M NaOH (997 μΙ_, 9.97 μηιοΙ) and the dark purple solution filtered through a 0.45 μηι syringe filter unit. The product was lyophilised to give the sodium salt of 25 (1 1.6 mg, 99%) as a fluffy purple powder. Example 2: In vitro binding properties of Compounds 22 and 25 (R-BC154) to α4βιθη α9βι-
For assessing R-BC154 binding on sorted populations of progenitor cells (LSK cells), whole bone marrow was harvested from untreated and treated (R-BC154; 10 mg kg-1 ) mice (3 mice per group). Lineage positive cells were immunolabelled using a lineage cocktail (B220, Gr-1 , Mac-1 and Ter-1 19) and then removed by immunomagnetic selection with sheep anti-rat conjugated Dynabeads (Invitrogen) according to the manufacturer's instructions. The resultant lineage depleted cells were stained with anti-Sca-1 -PB and anti-c-kit-FITC. Immunolabelled cells were sorted on Sca-1 +c-kit+ using a Cytopeia Influx (BD Biosciences) cell sorter and imaged using an Olympus BX51 microscope.
With fluorescent probes compounds 22 and 25 (R-BC154) in hand, the integrin dependent cell binding properties were assessed using α4βι and <¾βι over-expressing human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines that were generated. In short, stable LN18 cells over-expressing integrin α4βι and θθβι were generated via retroviral transduction of human glioblastoma LN18 cell lines. Silencing of background a4 expression in parental and θθβι transduced LN18 cells was achieved by retroviral vector delivery of a4 shRNA (J Grassinger, et al Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59). (See Figures 1 and 2). When each LN18 cell line was treated with compounds 22 and R-BC154 (25) under physiological mimicking conditions (1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+), both compounds were found to bind α4βι and <¾βι LN18 cells in a dose-dependent manner (Figure 3a and b). Virtually no binding was observed in the control cell line, which lacks integrin expression indicating that binding is integrin specific (Figure 3a and b). Both the PEG-linked compound 22 and R-BC154 (25) bound α9βι integrin with greater selectivity than α4βι integrin as determined by their calculated dissociation constants (Kd). Specifically, compound 22 binds <¾βι (Kd = 8.4 nM) with 2.4- fold greater affinity than α4βι (Kd = 20.1 nM) and R-BC154 has 3 times greater affinities for <¾βι (Kd = 12.7 nM) relative to α4βι (Kd = 38.0 nM) under Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions (Figure 3a and b).
Interestingly, when compared to compound 22, R-BC154 was associated with only a 1 .9-fold and 1 .5-fold reduction in binding affinity to α4βι and <¾βι integrins, respectively.
These results suggest that both α4βι and θθβι integrins can indeed tolerate significant steric encumbrances at the 4-position of the proline residue for this class of N- phenylsulfonyl proline- based integrin antagonists. This observation indicates that there may be minimal benefits for the incorporation of a PEG linker.
The surprisingly high affinities of R-BC154 to α9βια4βι integrins prompted further exploration of its binding properties. Like many integrin ligands, the affinity and binding kinetics of R-BC154 is also dependent on the activation state of integrins, which can be regulated by divalent metal cations. As expected, no integrin binding was observed in the absence of cations (Figure 4). However, in the presence of 1 mM Mn2+, conditions known to induce integrins to adopt a higher affinity binding confirmation, greater overall binding was observed to both α4βι and θθβι over- expressing LN18 cell lines (Figure 3b and c). Additionally, under Mn2+ activation a 3.1 - fold increase in the binding affinity of R-BC154 towards α4βι (Kd = 12.4 nM) was observed when compared to Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions (Kd = 38.0 nM) (Figure 3b). Despite the greater overall level of θθβι integrin binding that was induced by the addition of Mn2+, a minimal change in the binding affinity was evident when compared to Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions (Kd = 14.4 nM vs. 12.7nM, respectively) (Figure 3b).
The differences in the biochemical properties of α4βι and θθβι integrins were further investigated by measuring the kinetics of R-BC154 binding. Association rate measurements showed R-BC154 binding under Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions was faster relative to Mn2+ conditions for both α4βι and <¾βι integrins (Figure 5a and b, respectively). Calculation of the on-rate constants (kon) showed R-BC154 binding to α4βι integrin (kon =0.094 nM-1 rnin"1 ) was faster than α9βι binding (kon = 0.061 nM-1 min-1 ) under physiological conditions (Table 3). Nevertheless, similar kon values were observed under Mn2+ activation for both α4βι (kon = 0.038 nM-1 min-1 ) and <¾βι integrins (kon~ 0.04 nM-1 min-1 ) (Table 3).
The off-rate kinetics of R-BC154 binding was determined by dissociation experiments. Under both Ca2+/Mg2+ and Mn2+ states, dissociation rates were faster for the R- BC154- α4βι complex (k0ff = 0.717 and 0.014 min-1 ) compared to its <¾βι (k0ff = 0.054 and <0.01 min-1 ) counterpart (Figure 5c and Table 3). In addition, the koff values for R-BC154 binding to α4βι and α9βι integrins in the presence of Mn2+ was significantly slower compared to Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions, with greater than 60% of R-BC154 still bound after 60 min (Figure 5c). The slower off-rates observed under these conditions suggests Mn2+ acts to stabilise the ligand bound conformation and is consistent with previous reports using radiolabeled substrates. Thus, while faster on-rates and off rates are observed with Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions, Mn2+ activation is associated with slower on- and off-rates for α4βι and <¾βι integrin binding. Consequently, competitive inhibition assays using R-BC154 for in vitro screening of small molecule integrin inhibitors under Ca2+/Mg2+ conditions is preferred as the exceedingly slow off rates under Mn2+ activation would require much longer incubation time.
These results suggest that although α4βι integrin binds slightly faster to this class of N-phenylsulfonyl proline-based antagonists compared to α9βι, more prolonged binding is observed for <¾βι integrin (Table 3). Thus, under physiologically relevant conditions, this class of dual α9βια4βι integrin inhibitors might be expected to elicit greater affects against <¾βι integrin-dependent inter- actions in vivo owing to their significantly slower off-rates to θθβι despite the higher association rates observed for α4βι integrin.
Table 3 Summary of R-BC154 binding properties to α4βι and α9βι overexpressing LN18 cells in the presence of Ca2+/Mg2+ or Mn2+Conditions
Figure imgf000088_0001
aThe observed association rate (k0bS) represents the fast phase of binding and accounts for >60% and >80% of R- BC154 binding to α4 ι and αθ ι integrins, respectively. Data from the dissociation experiment represented in Figure 5c was fitted to a one-phase exponential decay function (unless otherwise stated) and dissociation rate constants (k0ff) extrapolated from the curve. c Dissociation data for R-BC154 binding to θ βι LN18 cells in the presence of Ca2+/Mg2+ was fitted to a two-phase dissociation curve and k0ff was determined from the fast-phase of the curve, which accounted for >60% of the dissociation. d Dissociation of the R-BC154- α9β1 integrin complex under Mn2+ activation was too slow (>55% still bound after 120 min; data not shown) to accurately calculate off- rates; k0ff value was estimated based on an approximate half-life of "100 min. e The association rate constant (kon) was calculated using the formula (k0bS _ k0ff)/[R-BC154 concentration = 50 nM].
Example 3: In vivo binding of Compound 25 (R-BC154) to bone marrow HSC and progenitor cells
The in vitro binding data demonstrated that R-BC154 is a high affinity α4βι and <¾βι integrin antagonist, whose binding activity is highly dependent on integrin activation. This example tests whether R-BC154 could be used in in vivo binding experiments to investigate α9βι α4βι integrin activity on defined populations of HSC. To date, assessing integrin activity on HSC has relied primarily on in vitro or ex vivo staining of bone marrow cells or purified HSC using fluorescent labelled antibodies. Whilst ex vivo staining provides confirmation of integrin expression by HSC, investigation of integrin activation in their native state within bone marrow can only be determined through in vivo binding experiments, as the complex bone marrow microenvironment cannot be adequately reconstructed in vitro.
To assess whether R-BC154 and this class of N-phenylsulfonyl proline-based peptidomimetics could bind directly to HSC, R-BC154 (10 mg kg-1) was injected intravenously into mice and analysed for R-BC154 labelling of phenotypically defined bone marrow progenitor cells (LSK cell; lineage-Sca-1 +c-Kit+) and HSC (LSKSLAM cell; LSKCD48-CD150+) using multi-colour flow cytometry (Figure 6a and b). Increased cell-associated fluorescence as a result of R-BC154 binding was observed for both progenitor cells and HSC populations that were isolated from R-BC154 injected mice when compared to bone marrow from un-injected mice. Furthermore, in vivo R-BC154 binding was also confirmed by fluorescence microscopy on purified populations of progenitor cells (Lineage-Sca-1 +c-Kit+) (Figure 6c and d). R-BC154 labelled progenitor cells exhibited a fluorescence halo indicating R-BC154 binding was primarily cell surface, which is consistent with integrin-binding. The in vivo binding results indicate that this class of α9βι α4βι integrin antagonists are capable of binding to extremely rare populations of haemopoietic progenitor cells and HSC, which represent only 0.2% and 0.002% of mononucleated cells within murine bone marrow, respectively. The α4βι and θθβι integrins are recognised to be important modulators of HSC lodgement within bone marrow through binding to VCAM-1 and Opn. (J. Grassinger et al, Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49-59). BOP has been shown to inhibit binding of α4βι and α9βι integrins to both VCAM-1 and Opn in vitro with nanomolar inhibitory potencies. These in vivo binding results using R-BC154 indicate that the α4βι and <¾βι integrins expressed by HSC are in an active binding conformation in situ. This suggests that small molecule α9βι α4βι integrin antagonists such as compounds 22 and 25, not only bind directly to bone marrow HSC, but they are also be capable of inhibiting α9βια4βι dependent adhesive interactions and potentially serve as effective agents for inducing the mobilisation of bone marrow HSC into the peripheral circulation as shown below.
Example 4 - R-BC154 binds preferentially to mice and human haematopoietic progenitor cells in vitro
It has been shown in the examples above that R-BC154 (Figure 7a) binds human glioblastoma LN18 cells overexpressing human ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins (Figure. 7b) only in the presence of divalent metal cations such as Ca2+, Mg2+ or Mn2+, which act to induce conformational changes required for high affinity integrin binding in vitro. To determine whether integrin activation is required for binding to both central and endosteal BM progenitors (Lin"Sca-1 +ckit+ cells; LSK) and HSC (LSKCD150+CD48~ cells; LSKSLAM) (Figure. 7c), R-BC154 binding was assessed in the presence of 1 mM Ca2+/Mg2+ (Figure 7d). Under these conditions, greater binding to central LSK and LSKSLAM was observed relative to their endosteal counterparts (p<0.005) (Figure 7e). Deactivation of surface integrins by co-treatment with EDTA completely abolished activity demonstrating the requirement of integrin activation for efficient R- BC154 binding to HSC and progenitors (Figure 7e). In the absence of both activating cations and EDTA, R-BC154 binding to endosteal LSK cells was still evident but not to central LSK (Figure 7f). These results suggest integrins expressed by HSC and progenitors isolated from the endosteal BM remain activated upon harvest. Since integrin ο¾βι is ubiquitously expressed on all leukocytes and ο¾βι is known to be widely expressed on neutrophils, R-BC154 binding to lineage-committed haematopoietic cells was assessed. It was found that activation dependent binding was observed on all lineage committed lymphoid (B220+ and CD3+) and myeloid (Gr1/Mac1 +) progeny isolated from both the central and endosteal BM regions under exogenous activation (Figure 8). However, this binding was significantly lower relative to LSKSLAM (p<0.0001 ) and LSK (p<0.0001 ) cells (Figure 7g). To confirm whether binding to HSC and progenitor cells is ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrin dependent, BM cells devoid of o¾ and o¾ integrins in haematopoietic cells (o¾flox floxa9flox flox vav-cre mice) were treated with R-BC154. Binding was essentially absent on LSK (p<0.005) and LSKSLAM (p<0.005) a4 ' /ag' cells confirming the requirement of these two integrins for R-BC154 activity (Figure 7h).
Divalent cation and dose dependent binding of R-BC154 was also confirmed on human cord blood mononuclear cells (MNC) (Figure 7i). Under activating conditions, greater binding was observed on stem cell enriched CD34+CD38" cells compared to lineage-committed CD34" cells, albeit to a lesser extent relative to CD34+CD38+ progenitor cells (Figure 7j and 7k). These results show R-BC154 binding to murine and human haematopoietic cells is divalent metal cation dependent and is also biased towards haematopoietic progenitor cells relative to HSC under exogenous activation in vitro. Example 5 - R-BC154 targets HSC and progenitors via intrinsically activated 04/0(9 integrins within the endosteal niche in situ.
Integrins exist in multiple activation states and their regulation by the stem cell niche is complex and cannot be accurately mimicked or recapitulated in vitro. To assess whether αθβι ο^βι integrins expressed by HSC and progenitors within BM are intrinsically and differentially activated in situ, C57BI/6 mice were injected with R- BC154 prior to immunolabelling for LSKSLAM. LSK cells from both central and endosteal BM regions were effectively labelled with R-BC154 following i.v. administration (Figure 9a). However, both LSK and LSKSLAM cells within the endosteal BM exhibited a greater proportion of R-BC154hl cells in comparison to their central BM counterparts (Figure 9b) and is consistent with in vitro experiments performed in the absence of activating divalent metal cations (see Figure 7f). Lymphoid (B220+ and CD3+) and myeloid (Gr1 + and Mac1 +) progenies also exhibited a greater proportion of R-BC154hl cells within endosteal BM, suggesting enhanced integrin activation is not restricted to primitive haematopoietic populations (Figure 9c). No binding of R-BC154 was evident on 04 ~'~IOQ ~'~ LSK cells, confirming the requirement of o¾ and o¾ integrins for in vivo activity (Figure 9d). These data suggests αθβι ο^βι integrins are not only required but are also intrinsically and differentially activated on cells in the endosteal BM region in situ.
Example 6 - Small molecule α9βι/α4βι integrin antagonists rapidly mobilise HSC and progenitor cells
Several murine assays exist for assessing novel mobilization agents in their ability to induce the egress of HSC into PB such as described in Herbert, K. E., et al Biol Blood Marrow Tr 14, 603-621 , (2008). Although LSK and LSKSLAM cells in normal PB only constitute -0.005% and -0.0005% of circulating WBC, respectively, sorted LSK and LSKSLAM from PB have been shown to give rise to colony forming cells (CFCs) and thus comprise cells capable of haematopoietic reconstitution capacity. Thus, the determination of LSK and LSKSLAM content in PB was initially used as a surrogate measure of stem and progenitor cell content.
Initially, the rapid clearance of R-BC154 following i.v. administration (<5 minutes) prompted the assessment of other modes of administration and whether s.c. injections would afford sustained binding activity in vivo and thus allow greatest mobilization efficiencies. In contrast to i.v. injections, persistent binding to BM LSK was observed 30 mins post-s.c. treatment (Figure 9e). Minimal binding was observed on LSK in the PB compared to their BM counterparts, providing further evidence of the requirement of the stem cell niche for effective activation and integrin dependent binding (Figure 9e). Nevertheless, mice treated with R-BC154 were not found to give significant increases in the number of WBC, LSK or LSKSLAM in PB (Figure 10). HSC mobilization with α9βι α4βι integrin inhibitors was further investigated using the non-fluorescently labelled BOP (2) (Figure 1 1 a). BOP was shown to be a potent inhibitor of <¾βι and α4βι integrins based on competitive inhibition assays using R- BC154 and overexpressing LN18 cell lines (Figure 1 1 b) and can inhibit integrin dependent adhesion to VCAM-1 and thrombin-cleaved Opn. Additionally, BOP effectively inhibited θθβι and α4βι integrin binding on HSC and progenitors, demonstrated by competitive displacement of R-BC154 binding to LSK and LSKSLAM under activating conditions (Figure 1 1 c). Administration of BOP (10 mg/kg) into C57BL/6 mice for up to 90 mins gave significant increases in PB WBC (Figure 1 1 d), LSK (Figure 1 1 e) and LSKSLAM (Figure 1 1f) compared to the saline control. Unlike R-BC154, greater and more sustained mobilization was observed with BOP, presumably due to its higher binding affinity and slower dissociation-rates. HSC are known to express several integrin subtypes including ανβ3, <¾_β2, α2βι , ο¾βι, ο¾βι ο¾βι and ο¾βι, many of which have been implicated in HSC retention within BM. In the above examples, evidence is provided to show that inhibition of α9βι ο¾βι integrins using a small molecule antagonist BOP induces the rapid mobilization of long-term repopulating HSC through inhibition of integrin-dependent binding to VCAM-1 and Opn.
Previous studies have confirmed that inhibition of integrin ο¾βι and VCAM-1 interactions using neutralizing antibodies or small molecule inhibitors mobilize HSC in both mice and primates, yet the specific cell types that are targeted for mobilization and the location of these target cells within BM has yet to be explored. Using a fluorescent small molecule integrin antagonist (R-BC154) that binds to ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins only when activated by divalent metal cations, it is shown for the first time that the activation state of these two βι integrins on murine and human HSC are intrinsically activated and differentially specified by the endosteal niche in vivo.
The functional characteristics of the endosteal BM has been thoroughly investigated since the concept of a stem cell niche was originally postulated by Schofield in 1978. Such studies have highlighted the endosteal niche as a hypoxic environment where cell components such as osteoblasts and their associated extracellular matrix proteins are important niche specific regulators of HSC maintenance and function. These examples show that BM cells within the endosteal niche including HSC and progenitor cells express αθβι ο^βι integrins that are in a higher affinity binding state beyond what is observed within the central medullary compartment. Although the physiological relevance of this differential integrin activity remains unknown, these observations are consistent with previous reports that HSC-dependent binding between thrombin- cleaved Opn (trOpn) and ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins is restricted to the endosteal bone marrow.
The enhanced activation of integrins by the endosteum was not specific to primitive HSC and progenitors and is unlikely to be restricted to just ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins. Without being limited by theory, one possible explanation for the enhanced integrin activation observed within endosteal BM is its close proximity to bone. Bone, being distinguishable from other microenvironment cells based on its high mineral content, is the primary storage site of inorganic salts of calcium and magnesium as well as trace metals such as manganese, all of which are known to induce ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins to adopt higher affinity ligand-binding conformations. Thus, it remains plausible that high ionic gradients of Ca2+ (and perhaps Mg2+ and Mn2+) emanating from the endosteal surface is responsible for the enhanced integrin binding activity observed. Indeed, this concept has been previously invoked to rationalize the preferential localization of HSC within endosteal BM via recognition of extracellular Ca2+ through the G protein-coupled calcium-sensing receptor (CaR). Collectively, these observations further define the unique nature of the endosteal niche, the differential influence it confers in seemingly phenotypically identical cells and provides validation of therapeutic targeting of the stem cell niche for stem cell therapies. In summary, it is demonstrated that BOP, a small molecule inhibitor of ο¾βι and ο¾βι integrins, effectively and rapidly mobilized HSC with long-term multi-lineage engraftment potential. While the foregoing written description of the invention enables one of ordinary skill to make and use what is considered presently to be the best mode thereof, those of ordinary skill will understand and appreciate the existence of variations, combinations, and equivalents of the specific embodiment, method, and examples herein. The invention should therefore not be limited by the above described embodiment, method, and examples, but by all embodiments and methods within the scope and spirit of the invention as broadly described herein.
REFERENCES
J. Grassinger, D. N. Haylock, M. J. Storan, G. O. Haines, B. Williams, G. A. Whitty, A. R. Vinson, C. L. Be, S. H. Li, E. S. Sorensen, P. P. L. Tarn, D. T. Denhardt, D. Sheppard, P. F. Choong and S. K. Nilsson, Blood, 2009, 1 14, 49- 59.
D. N. Haylock, B. Williams, H. M. Johnston, M. C. P. Liu, K. E. Rutherford, G. A. Whitty, P. J. Simmons, I. Bertoncello and S. K. Nilsson, Stem Cells, 2007, 25, 1062-1069.
J. Grassinger, B. Williams, G. H. Olsen, D. N. Haylock and S. K. Nilsson, Cytokine, 2012, 58, 218-225.
Nilsson, S. K. et al. Osteopontin, a key component of the haematopoietic stem cell niche and regulator of primitive haematopoietic progenitor cells. Blood 106, 1232-1239, doi:10.1 182/blood-2004-1 1 -4422 (2005).
Grassinger, J. et al. Thrombin-cleaved osteopontin regulates haematopoietic stem and progenitor cell functions through interactions with alpha(9)beta(1 ) and alpha(4)beta(1 ) integrins. Blood 1 14, 49-59, doi:DOI 10.1182/blood-2009- 01 -197988 (2009).
Bartelmez, S. H. et al. lnterleukin-1 Plus lnterleukin-3 Plus Colony-Stimulating Factor-I Are Essential for Clonal Proliferation of Primitive Myeloid Bone-Marrow Cells. Experimental Hematology 17, 240-245 (1989).
Herbert, K. E., Levesque, J. P., Haylock, D. N. & Princes, M. The use of experimental murine models to assess novel agents of haematopoietic stem and progenitor cell mobilization. Biol Blood Marrow Tr 14, 603-621 , doi:DOI 10.1016/j.bbmt.2008.02.003 (2008).
Cao, B. et al. Design, synthesis and binding properties of a fluorescent alpha(9)beta(1 )/alpha(4)beta(1 ) integrin antagonist and its application as an in vivo probe for bone marrow haemopoietic stem cells. Org. Biomol. Chem. 12, 965-978, doi:Doi 10.1039/C3ob42332h (2014).
Pepinsky, R. B. et al. Comparative assessment of the ligand and metal ion binding properties of integrins alpha 9 beta 1 and alpha 4 beta 1 . Biochemistry 41 , 7125-7141 , doi:Doi 10.1021/Bi020024d (2002).
Schofield, R. Relationship between Spleen Colony-Forming Cell and Haematopoietic Stem-Cell - Hypothesis. Blood Cells 4, 7-25 (1978)

Claims

THE CLAIMS DEFINING THE INVENTION ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1 . A method for enhancing dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in vivo or ex vivo, said method comprising administering in vivo or ex vivo an effective amount of an antagonist of an <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof to the BM stem cell niche.
2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said method further enhances release of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from the BM stem cell niche.
3. A method according to claim 1 or 2 wherein the method further enhances mobilization of the HSC from the BM stem cell niche.
4. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 4 wherein the <¾ integrin is an α9βι integrin or an active portion thereof.
5. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 4 further including administering an antagonist of a4 integrin or an active portion thereof. 6. A method according to claim 5 wherein the ct integrin is an antagonist of α βι or an active portion thereof.
7. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 6 wherein the antagonist cross- reacts with ctg and ct , and optionally cross-reacts with α9βι and α βι .
8. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 7 wherein the antagonist is a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
Figure imgf000096_0001
(I) wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and C1-C4 alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H; R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R1 1;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C4 alkyl), -C(O)-(C C alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R10 and R11 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(O)O-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of C C alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyi ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
9. A method according to claim 8 wherein:
R4 is H; and R5 is -OR7.
10. A method according to claim 8 or claim 9 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl, -CN, -O(Ci-C4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
1 1 . A method according to any one of claims 8 to 10 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of C C alkyl, -CN, -O(C C alkyl) and 5-tetrazolyl;
R13 is 2-pyrrolyl;
R14 and R15 are each independently Ci-C4 alkyl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl or morpholinyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
12. A method according to any one of claims 8 to 11 wherein the compound of Formula (I) is:
Figure imgf000098_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
13. The method according to any one of claims 8 to 12 wherein R1 is optionally substituted phenyl. 14. The method according to claim 13, wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with at least one halogen group.
The method according to any one of claims 8 to 14 wherein the compound of
Figure imgf000099_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
16. The method according to any one of claims 8 to 15, wherein the compound of formula (I) is
Figure imgf000099_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. 17. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 16 wherein the antagonist is administered in the absence of G-CSF.
18. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 17 wherein the ct9 integrin antagonist is administered intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, transdermally, transmucosally or intraperitoneally; optionally the antagonist is administered intravenously or subcutaneously.
19. A method according to any one of claims 5 to 18 wherein the ag integrin antagonist is administered simultaneously, consecutively or in combination with an a4 integrin antagonist. 20. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 19 wherein the HSC are derived from bone marrow.
21 . A method according to claim 20 wherein the HSC are derived from the stem cell niche, optionally the central or endosteal niche of the bone marrow.
22. A method according to anyone of claims 1 to 21 wherein the HSC are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group including CD34+cells, CD38+ cells, CD90+ cells, CD133+ cells, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells.
23. A composition for enhancing dislodgement of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand said composition comprising an antagonist of ag integrin or an active portion thereof. 24. A composition according to claim 23 further enhancing release of HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand.
25. A composition according to claim 24 further enhancing mobilization of HSC from a BM stem cell niche to PB.
26. A composition according to any one of claims 23 to 25 wherein the ag integrin is an agPi integrin or an active portion thereof.
27. A composition according to any one of claims 23 or 26 further including an antagonist of a4 integrin or an active portion thereof.
28. A composition according to claim 27 wherein the a4 integrin is an antagonist of α4βι or an active portion thereof.
29. A composition according to any one of claims 23 to 28 wherein the antagonist cross-reacts with <¾ and a4, and optionally cross-reacts with <¾βι and α4βι .
30. A composition according to any one of claims 23 to 29 wherein the ct9 integrin antagonist is a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
Figure imgf000101_0001
wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -SO2 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and Ci-C4 alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R1 1;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)-(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)O-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R10 and R11 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(C C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
31 . A composition according to claim 30 wherein:
R4 is H; and
R5 is -OR7.
32. A composition according to claim 23 or 31 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -O(C C alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of C C alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
33. A composition according to any one of claims 23 to 32 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of C C alkyl, -CN, -O(C C alkyl) and 5-tetrazolyl;
R13 is 2-pyrrolyl; R14 and R15 are each independently C1 -C4 alkyl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl or morpholinyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
34. A composition according any one of claims 23 to 33 wherein the compound of Formula (I) is:
Figure imgf000103_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
35. A composition according to any one of claims 23 to 34 wherein R1 is optionally substituted phenyl. 36. The composition according to claim 35, wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with at least one halogen group.
37. The composition according to any one of claims 23 to 36 wherein the compound of Formula (I) is
Figure imgf000103_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
38. The composition according to any one of claims 23 to 37, wherein the compound of formula (I) is
Figure imgf000104_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
39. A composition according to any one of claims 30 to 38 for administering in the absence of G-CSF.
40. A composition according to any one of claims 30 to 39 for administering intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, transdermally, transmucosally or intraperitoneally; optionally the composition is administered intravenously or subcutaneously.
41 . A composition according to any one of claims 30 to 40 wherein the ctg integrin antagonist is administered simultaneously, consecutively or in combination with an <¾ integrin antagonist.
42. A composition according to any one of claims 30 to 41 wherein the HSC are derived from bone marrow.
43. A composition according to any one of claims 30 to 42 wherein the HSC are derived from the stem cell niche, optionally the central or endosteal niche of the bone marrow.
44. A composition according to anyone of claims 30 to 43 wherein the HSC are endosteal progenitor cells selected from the group including CD34+cells, CD38+ cells, CD90+ cells, CD133+ cells, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells.
45. A method of harvesting HSC from a subject said method comprising:
administering an effective amount of an antagonist of ct9 integrin or an active portion thereof to a subject wherein said effective amount enhances dislodgement of HSC and their precursors and progenitors thereof from a BM stem cell binding ligand in a BM stem cell niche;
mobilizing the dislodged HSC to PB; andharvesting the HSC from the PB. 46. A method according to claim 45 wherein the <¾ integrin antagonist is administered in the absence of G-CSF.
47. A method according to claim 45 wherein the HSC are further mobilized by the use of other HSC mobilizing agents such as, but not limited to interleukin-17, cyclophosphamide (Cy), Docetaxel and granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G- CSF).
48. A method according to claim 45 or 46 the effective amount of the integrin antagonist is in the range 25 - 1000μg kg body weight, more preferably 50 - 500μg kg body weight, most preferably 50 - 250μg kg body weight.
49. A cell composition comprising HSC obtained from a method according to any one of claims 45 to 48. 50. A method for the treatment of a haematological disorder said method comprising administering a cell composition according to claim 23 to 44 or a cell composition according to claim 49. .
51 . A method for the treatment of a haematological disorder in a subject said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an antagonist of <¾ integrin or an active portion thereof to the subject to enhance dislodgement, release or mobilization of HSC from the BM to the PB.
52. A method according to claim 51 wherein the <¾ integrin is an ctgPi integrin or an active portion thereof.
53. A method according to claim 51 or 52 further including administering antagonist of a4 integrin or an active portion thereof.
54. A method according to claim 53 wherein the a4 integrin is an antagonist of α4βι or an active portion thereof.
55. A method according to any one of claims 51 to 54 wherein the antagonist cross-reacts with <¾ and ct4, and optionally cross-reacts with <¾βι and α4βι .
56. A method according to any one of claims 50 to 55 wherein the antagonist is a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
Figure imgf000106_0001
wherein
X is selected from the group consisting of a bond and -S02 -;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of H and a substituent group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of H and C C alkyl;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR6;
R5 is selected from the group consisting of H and -OR7;
provided that when R4 is H then R5 is -OR7 and when R4 is -OR6 then R5 is H;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R8, -C(O)R9 and -C(O)NR10R1 1;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, d-C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R8 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C alkyl), -C(O)-(C C alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl; R10 and R11 , together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O(C C alkyl), -C(O)- (C1-C4 alkyl), -C(0)0-(d-C4 alkyl) and -CN;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of C C alkyl and optionally substituted aryl, or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n at each occurrence is an integer in the range of from 1 to 3.
A method according to claim 56 wherein
R4 is H; and
R5 is -OR7.
58. A method according to claim 56 or claim 57 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15;
R12 is selected from the group consisting of -CN, -O(Ci-C4 alkyl) and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R13 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted cycloalkyi, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R14 and R15 are each independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-C4 alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
59. A method according to any one of claims 56 to 58 wherein:
R7 is selected from the group consisting of C C4 alkyl, -(CH2)n-R12, -C(O)R13 and -C(O)NR14R15; R12 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C4 alkyl, -CN, -0(Ci-C4 alkyl) and 5-tetrazolyl;
R13 is 2-pyrrolyl;
R14 and R15 are each independently C C4 alkyl or
R14 and R15, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl or morpholinyl ring; and
n is 1 or 2.
60. A method according any one of claims 56 to 59 wherein the compound Formula (I) is:
Figure imgf000108_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. 61 . The method according to any one of claims 56 to 60 wherein R1 is optionally substituted phenyl.
62. The method according to claim 61 , wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with at least one halogen group.
63. The method according to any one of claims 56 to 62 wherein the compound of Formula (I) is
Figure imgf000108_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
64. The method according to any one of claims 56 to 63, wherein the compound of formula (I) is
Figure imgf000109_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
65. A method according to any one of claims 51 to 64 wherein the antagonist is administered in the absence of G-CSF. 66. A method according to any one of claims 51 to 65 wherein the ct9 integrin antagonist is administered intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, transdermally, or transmucosally; optionally the antagonist is administered intravenously or subcutaneously. 67. A method according to any one of claims 51 to 66 wherein the ctg integrin antagonist is administered simultaneously, consecutively or in combination with an a4 integrin antagonist.
68. A method according to any one of claims 51 to 67 wherein the haematological disorder is selected from the group including immunosuppression, chronic illness, traumatic injury, degenerative disease, infection, or combinations thereof; a disease or condition of the skin, digestive system, nervous system, lymph system, cardiovascular system, endocrine system, or combinations thereof; osteoporosis, Alzheimer's disease, cardiac infarction, Parkinson's disease, traumatic brain injury, multiple sclerosis, cirrhosis of the liver, or combinations thereof; neuroblastoma, myelodysplasia, myelofibrosis, breast cancer, renal cell carcinoma, or multiple myeloma; haematopoietic neoplastic disorder; autoimmune disease; or non-malignant disorder.
69. A method according to claim 68 wherein the haematological disorder is acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL) selected form the group including B-lineage ALL and T- lineage ALL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia (PLL), hairy cell leukemia (HLL) and Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM).
70. A method of transplanting HSC into a patient, said method comprising
administering an ct9 integrin antagonist to a subject to dislodge HSC from a BM stem cell binding ligand;
releasing and mobilizing the HSC from the BM to the PB;
harvesting HSC from the PB from the subject; and
transplanting the HSC to the patient.
71 . A method according to claim 70 wherein the HSC are endosteal progenitor cells and are selected from the group comprising CD34+, CD38+, CD90+, CD133+, CD34+CD38" cells, lineage-committed CD34" cells, or CD34+CD38+ cells
PCT/AU2014/001124 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists WO2016090403A1 (en)

Priority Applications (11)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020217032814A KR20210128024A (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
SG11201704532VA SG11201704532VA (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
BR112017012365A BR112017012365A2 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 eviction and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha-9-integrin antagonists.
CN201480084631.4A CN107405331A (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Migrated using the integrin antagonists of α 9 from stem cell tabernacle and discharge HSC
JP2017531344A JP2017538715A (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Removal and release of HSC from bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha 9 integrin antagonist
PCT/AU2014/001124 WO2016090403A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
US15/535,117 US20170348375A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
AU2014413901A AU2014413901B2 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of HSC from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
KR1020177019250A KR20170109541A (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
EP14907978.2A EP3229797A4 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
CA2970058A CA2970058A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/AU2014/001124 WO2016090403A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016090403A1 true WO2016090403A1 (en) 2016-06-16

Family

ID=56106287

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/AU2014/001124 WO2016090403A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2014-12-12 Dislodgement and release of hsc from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists

Country Status (10)

Country Link
US (1) US20170348375A1 (en)
EP (1) EP3229797A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2017538715A (en)
KR (2) KR20170109541A (en)
CN (1) CN107405331A (en)
AU (1) AU2014413901B2 (en)
BR (1) BR112017012365A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2970058A1 (en)
SG (1) SG11201704532VA (en)
WO (1) WO2016090403A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021113922A1 (en) * 2019-12-12 2021-06-17 Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation Improved method for preparing n-(benzenesulfonyl)-l-prolyl- l-o-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020113094A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Nuvation Bio Inc. Pyrrole and pyrazole compounds and methods of use thereof

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004066931A2 (en) * 2003-01-24 2004-08-12 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Composition for and treatment of demyelinating diseases and paralysis by administration of remyelinating agents
US20090252734A1 (en) * 2006-07-12 2009-10-08 Masashi Kanayama Antihuman alpha 9 Integrin Antibody and use of the Same

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002512625A (en) * 1997-05-29 2002-04-23 メルク エンド カンパニー インコーポレーテッド Heterocyclic amide compounds as cell adhesion inhibitors
AR016133A1 (en) * 1997-07-31 2001-06-20 Wyeth Corp CARBAMILOXI COMPOUND INHIBITING THE ADHESION OF LEUKOCYTES THROUGH VLA-4, COMPOUNDS THAT ARE DRUGS OF THESE COMPOUNDS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, METHOD FOR SETTING VLA-4 TO A BIOLOGICAL SAMPLE, METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF A TREATMENT
EP1253923A1 (en) * 2000-01-28 2002-11-06 Biogen, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions containing anti-beta 1 integrin compounds and uses
PT1542714E (en) * 2002-09-18 2014-06-23 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods of increasing platelet and hematopoietic stem cell production
JP4871740B2 (en) * 2005-01-13 2012-02-08 株式会社ジーンテクノサイエンス Anti-α9 integrin antibody and its use
WO2013137396A1 (en) * 2012-03-15 2013-09-19 国立大学法人大阪大学 NOVEL INTEGRIN α9β1 LIGAND AND USES THEREOF

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004066931A2 (en) * 2003-01-24 2004-08-12 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Composition for and treatment of demyelinating diseases and paralysis by administration of remyelinating agents
US20090252734A1 (en) * 2006-07-12 2009-10-08 Masashi Kanayama Antihuman alpha 9 Integrin Antibody and use of the Same

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CAO, B. ET AL.: "Design, synthesis and binding properties of a fluorescent alpha9beta1/alpha4beta1 integrin antagonist and its application as an in vivo probe for bone marrow haematopoietic stem cells", ORGANIC & BIOMOLECULAR CHEMISTRY, vol. 12, no. 6, February 2014 (2014-02-01), pages 965 - 978, XP055385355 *
GRASSINGER, J. ET AL.: "Homing, proliferation and mobilization of hematopoietic stem cells is regulated through the interaction of alpha9beta1 and Osteopontin", ONKOLOGIE, vol. 33, no. Supplement 6, September 2010 (2010-09-01), pages 217, XP008185475 *
GRASSINGER, J. ET AL.: "Thrombin-cleaved osteopontin regulates hemopoietic stem and progenitor cell functions through interactions with alpha9beta1 and alpha4beta1 integrins", BLOOD, vol. 114, no. 1, July 2009 (2009-07-01), pages 49 - 59, XP055385370 *
PEPINSKY, R. B. ET AL.: "Comparative Assessment of the Ligand and Metal Ion Binding Properties of Integrins alpha9beta1 and alpha4beta1", BIOCHEMISTRY, vol. 41, no. 22, June 2002 (2002-06-01), pages 7125 - 7141, XP008067972, DOI: doi:10.1021/bi020024d *
See also references of EP3229797A4 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021113922A1 (en) * 2019-12-12 2021-06-17 Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation Improved method for preparing n-(benzenesulfonyl)-l-prolyl- l-o-(1-pyrrolidinylcarbonyl)tyrosine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
SG11201704532VA (en) 2017-07-28
CA2970058A1 (en) 2016-06-16
US20170348375A1 (en) 2017-12-07
KR20170109541A (en) 2017-09-29
AU2014413901A1 (en) 2017-06-29
BR112017012365A2 (en) 2018-04-24
CN107405331A (en) 2017-11-28
KR20210128024A (en) 2021-10-25
EP3229797A1 (en) 2017-10-18
EP3229797A4 (en) 2018-08-15
AU2014413901B2 (en) 2021-04-01
JP2017538715A (en) 2017-12-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2015362089B2 (en) Dislodgement and release of HSC using alpha 9 integrin antagonist and CXCR4 antagonist
JP6805220B2 (en) Therapeutically active compounds and how to use them
TWI485148B (en) Smac mimetic
AU2022221145A1 (en) Quinazoline compound for inducing degradation of G12D mutant KRAS protein
CN111566109B (en) 2,4,6, 7-tetrahydropyrazolo [4,3-d ] pyrimidin-5-one derivatives and related compounds for the treatment of vasculitis and inflammatory diseases
KR20220154850A (en) Pyrimidinyl tyrosine kinase inhibitors
JP2020519584A (en) Apoptosis signal-regulated kinase 1 inhibitor and method of using the same
US11325889B2 (en) Substituted 3-((3-aminophenyl)amino)piperidine-2,6-dione compounds, compositions thereof, and methods of treatment therewith
CN111295380B (en) High-activity CSF1R inhibitor compound
WO2018085552A1 (en) Integrin antagonists
WO2019158070A1 (en) A2a and/or a2b receptor antagonist
JP2021511324A (en) C5A receptor regulator
WO2023119677A1 (en) Pharmaceutical composition comprising a quinazoline compound
AU2014413901B2 (en) Dislodgement and release of HSC from the bone marrow stem cell niche using alpha9 integrin antagonists
JPH06503344A (en) Synergistic compositions of soluble complement receptors and compounds that inhibit complement and/or suppress immune activity
US10882854B2 (en) Heterocyclic compounds and use thereof
JP2017538715A5 (en)
CN111440148B (en) Preparation method of adenosine receptor antagonist
RU2783647C2 (en) Inhibitors of apoptotic signal-regulating kinase 1, and their production methods
TW202329953A (en) Aromatic vinyl compound, metal complex thereof, and preparation method therefor and use thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14907978

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11201704532V

Country of ref document: SG

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2970058

Country of ref document: CA

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2014907978

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017531344

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 15535117

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014413901

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20141212

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20177019250

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112017012365

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112017012365

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20170609